BA00443C/07/EN/26.22-00
71588421
2022-09-16

Products

Solutions

Valid as of version
01.12.01

Operating Instructions
Liquistation CSF48
Automatic sampler for liquid media

ServicesLiquistation CSF48

Table of contents

Table of contents
1

About this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

8

System integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Symbols on the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

8.1

Integrating the sampler in the system . . . . . . . 55

9Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

2

Basic safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5

Requirements for the personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

9.1
9.2
9.3

Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Setting the operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Configuring the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 59

10

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

3

Product description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

3.1
3.2
3.3

Product design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Equipment architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Terminal diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

4

Incoming acceptance and productidentification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4

Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Product identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Storage and transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Scope of delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

5

Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4

Mounting requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Setting up the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Sampling with a flow assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

6

Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

6.1
6.2
6.3

6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10

Connecting the sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Connecting the sampler controller . . . . . . . . . 31
Connecting the signal transmitter to thealarm relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Connecting the communication . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Connecting additional inputs, outputs orrelays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Connecting the supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Special connection instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Ensuring the degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . 48
Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

7

Operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

7.1
7.2

Overview of operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Structure and function of the operating
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Access to the operating menu via the local
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

6.4
6.5

7.3

Endress+Hauser

10.1 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
10.2 General settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
10.3 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
10.4 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
10.5 Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
10.6 Additional functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

11

Diagnostics and troubleshooting . . 158

11.1 General troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
11.2 Diagnostic information on local display . . . . . 159
11.3 Diagnostic information via web browser . . . . 159
11.4 Diagnostic information via fieldbus . . . . . . . . 159
11.5 Adapting the diagnostic information . . . . . . 160
11.6 Overview of diagnostic information . . . . . . . 162
11.7 Pending diagnostic messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
11.8 Diagnostics list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
11.9 Event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
11.10 Device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
11.11 Resetting the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
11.12 Firmware history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

12Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

12.1

Maintenance tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

13

Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

13.1 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
13.2 Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
13.3 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

14

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

14.1 Device-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
14.2 System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

15

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

15.1 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
15.2 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
15.3 Protocol-specific data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
15.4 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
15.5 Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
15.6 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
15.7 Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
15.8 Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
3

Table of contents

Liquistation CSF48

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

4

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

About this document

1

About this document

1.1

Warnings

Structure of information

Meaning

LDANGERThis symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation.
Failure to avoid the dangerous situation will result in a fatal or serious
injury.

Causes (/consequences)If necessary, Consequences of
non-compliance (if applicable)‣ Corrective action

LWARNING
Causes (/consequences)If necessary, Consequences of
non-compliance (if applicable)‣ Corrective action

LCAUTION
Causes (/consequences)If necessary, Consequences of
non-compliance (if applicable)‣ Corrective action
NOTICE
Cause/situation
If necessary, Consequences of
non-compliance (if applicable)‣ Action/note

1.2

This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation.
Failure to avoid the dangerous situation can result in a fatal or serious
injury.

This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation.
Failure to avoid this situation can result in minor or more serious injuries.

This symbol alerts you to situations which may result in damage toproperty.

Symbols
Additional information, tips
Permitted
Recommended
Forbidden or not recommended
Reference to device documentation
Reference to page
Reference to graphic



1.3

Result of a step

Symbols on the device
Reference to device documentation
Do not dispose of products bearing this marking as unsorted municipal waste. Instead, return themto the manufacturer for disposal under the applicable conditions.

Endress+Hauser

5About this document

Liquistation CSF48

1.4

Documentation

The following manuals complement these Operating Instructions and are available on the
product pages on the Internet:• Brief Operating Instructions Liquistation CSF48, KA01165C• Operating Instructions for Memosens, BA01245C• Software description for Memosens inputs• Calibration of Memosens sensors• Sensor-specific diagnostics and troubleshooting• Operating Instructions for HART communication, BA00486C• Onsite settings and installation instructions for HART
• Description of HART driver• Guidelines for communication via fieldbus and web server• HART, SD01187C• PROFIBUS, SD01188C• Modbus, SD01189C• Web server, SD01190C• Web server (optional), SD01190C• EtherNet/IP, SD01293C• Special Documentation: Sampler application manual SD01068C• Documentation on other devices in the Liquiline platform:• Liquiline CM44xR (DIN rail device)• Liquiline System CA80 (analyzer)• Liquiline System CAT8x0 (sample preparation)• Liquistation CSFxx (sampler)• Liquiport CSP44 (sampler)

6

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Basic safety instructions

2

Basic safety instructions

2.1

Requirements for the personnel• Installation, commissioning, operation and maintenance of the measuring system may
be carried out only by specially trained technical personnel.
• The technical personnel must be authorized by the plant operator to carry out the
specified activities.
• The electrical connection may be performed only by an electrical technician.
• The technical personnel must have read and understood these Operating Instructions
and must follow the instructions contained therein.
• Faults at the measuring point may only be rectified by authorized and specially trained
personnel.
Repairs not described in the Operating Instructions provided must be carried out only
directly at the manufacturer's site or by the service organization.

2.2

Intended use

Liquistation CSF48 is a stationary sampler for liquid media. The samples are taken
discontinuously using a vacuum pump or peristaltic pump or sampling assembly and arethen distributed into sampling containers and refrigerated.
The sampler is designed for use in the following applications:• Communal and industrial wastewater treatment plants• Laboratories and water management offices• Monitoring of liquid media in industrial processes
Use of the device for any purpose other than that described poses a threat to the safety ofpeople and of the entire measuring system, and is therefore not permitted. The
manufacturer is not liable for damage caused by improper or non-intended use.

2.3

Workplace safety

As the user, you are responsible for complying with the following safety conditions:• Installation guidelines• Local standards and regulations• Regulations for explosion protection
Electromagnetic compatibility• The product has been tested for electromagnetic compatibility in accordance with theapplicable international standards for industrial applications.
• The electromagnetic compatibility indicated applies only to a product that has beenconnected in accordance with these Operating Instructions.

Endress+Hauser

7Basic safety instructions

Liquistation CSF48

2.4

Operational safety

Before commissioning the entire measuring point:
1.

Verify that all connections are correct.

2.

Ensure that electrical cables and hose connections are undamaged.

3.

Do not operate damaged products, and protect them against unintentional operation.

4.

Label damaged products as defective.

During operation:‣ If faults cannot be rectified:products must be taken out of service and protected against unintentional operation.

LCAUTION
Programs not switched off during maintenance activities.
Risk of injury due to medium or cleaning agent!
‣ Quit any programs that are active.
‣ Switch to the service mode.
‣ If testing the cleaning function while cleaning is in progress, wear protective clothing,goggles and gloves or take other suitable measures to protect yourself.

8

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Basic safety instructions

2.5

Product safety

2.5.1

State-of-the-art technology

The product is designed to meet state-of-the-art safety requirements, has been tested, andleft the factory in a condition in which it is safe to operate. The relevant regulations andinternational standards have been observed.
Devices connected to the sampler must comply with the applicable safety standards.

2.5.2

IT security

We only provide a warranty if the device is installed and used as described in the
Operating Instructions. The device is equipped with security mechanisms to protect itagainst any inadvertent changes to the device settings.
IT security measures in line with operators' security standards and designed to provide
additional protection for the device and device data transfer must be implemented by theoperators themselves.

Endress+Hauser

9Product description

Liquistation CSF48

3

Product description

3.1

Product design

Depending on the version, a complete sampling unit for open channels comprises:• Controller with display, soft keys and navigator• Vacuum or peristaltic pump for sampling• PE or glass sample bottles for sample preservation• Sampling chamber temperature regulator (optional) for safe sample storage• Suction line with suction head

1
10

9
8

2
3
4

5
6

7

1

Controller

2

Window (optional)

3

Dosing compartment door

4

Suction line connection

5

Sampling chamber door

6

Sample bottles, e.g. 2 x 12
bottles, PE, 1 liter

7

Bottle trays (depending on
sample bottles selected)

8Distribution plate (dependingon sample bottles selected)

9Distribution arm

10 Vacuum system, e.g. Dosing
system with conductive
sample sensor
A0029715

1

Example of a Liquistation, version with vacuum pump

1
10

2
3
4

9
8

5
6

7

1

Controller

2

Window (optional)

3

Dosing compartment door

4

Suction line connection

5

Sampling chamber door

6

Sample bottles, e.g. 2 x 12
bottles, PE, 1 liter

7

Bottle trays (depending on
sample bottles selected)

8Distribution plate (dependingon sample bottles selected)

9Distribution arm

10 Peristaltic pump

A0024291

2

Example of a Liquistation, version with peristaltic pump

LWARNING
Risk of injury
Danger of injury due to rotating parts‣ When working on the open peristaltic pump, safeguard the sampler against
unintentional commissioning.

10

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Product description

A complete sampling unit for pressurized pipes comprises a Liquistation and Samplefit
CSA420 sampling assembly with:• Controller with display, soft keys and navigator• Samplefit CSA420 sampling assembly for 10 ml, 30 ml or 50 ml sample volume,
depending on version• PE or glass sample bottles for sample preservation• Sampling chamber temperature regulator (optional) for safe sample storage
2

1

Controller

2

Samplefit CSA420 sampling
assembly(0.5 m (1.6 ft)verticalbetween assembly andsampler)3

Gland for sample line

4

Sample bottles, e.g. 2 x 12
bottles, PE, 1 liter

5

Bottle trays (depending on
sample bottles selected)

6Distribution plate (dependingon sample bottles selected)

7Distribution arm

8Distribution plate (dependingon sample bottles selected)

9Distribution arm

1

8

3

7
6
4

10 Direct supply line for sample

5

A0024319

3

Example of a Liquistation CSF48 with CSA420 sampling assembly

4Samplefit CSA420 sampling assembly with flange connection DN50, PP

Example of Samplefit CSA420 sampling assembly with flange connection

A0024320

Example of Samplefit CSA420 sampling assembly with Triclamp connection

A0024321

5

Endress+Hauser

Samplefit CSA420 sampling assembly with Triclamp connection DN50, DIN 32676

11

Product description

Liquistation CSF48

3.2

Equipment architecture

3.2.1

Slot and port assignment

24V
12,5V
3,3V

DisplayService
BN

BN

WH

WH

GN

GN

YE

YE

+

+

1

+

2

Alarm
Power
B A –
(internal) 98 97 88 87

24VDC

43

+

2

GY

98 97 88 87
B A –Sensor

PK

1

GY

42 41

–

85 86

+

32 31
32 31
–
–
0/4 ... 20 mA
HART

2

–

Sensor supply

85

SD
PK

86

1

+

E

A0045689

6

Slot and port assignment of hardware and presentation on the display

The electronics configuration follows a modular concept:• There are several slots for electronics modules. These are referred to as "slots".
• These slots are numbered consecutively in the housing. Slots 0 and 1 are always reserved
for the base module.
• In addition there are also inputs and outputs for the control module. These slots arelabeled "S".
• Each electronics module has one or more inputs and outputs or relays. Here they are allcollectively known as "ports".
• Ports are consecutively numbered per electronics module and are recognizedautomatically by the software.
• Outputs and relays are named according to their function, e.g. "current output", and are
displayed in ascending order with the slot and port numbers.
Example:"Current output 2:1" shown on the display means: slot 2 (e.g. AOR module) : port 1(current output 1 of the AOR module)• Inputs are assigned to measuring channels in the ascending order of "slot:port number"
Example:"CH1: 1:1" shown on the display means:
Slot 1 (base module) : port 1 (input 1) is channel 1 (CH1).

12

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Product description

3.3

Terminal diagram

The unique terminal name is derived from:
Slot no. : Port no. : Terminal
Example, NO contact of a relay
Device with inputs for digital sensors, 4 current outputs and 4 relays• Base module BASE2-E (contains 2 sensor inputs, 2 current outputs)• 2AO module (2 current outputs)• 4R module (4 relays)

4R

43 42
41
43 42
41
43 42
41
43 42

Relay 1

2AO

Slot 4

Port 1 Pin 41

Relay 22DS

4
41

BASE2-E

3

2

Relay 3

1

Relay 4Slot

A0039621

7

Endress+Hauser

Creating a terminal diagram using the example of the NO contact (terminal 41) of a relay

13

Incoming acceptance and product identification

4

Incoming acceptance and productidentification

4.1

Incoming acceptance

Liquistation CSF48

1.

Verify that the packaging is undamaged.
 Notify the supplier of any damage to the packaging.
Keep the damaged packaging until the issue has been resolved.

2.

Verify that the contents are undamaged.
 Notify the supplier of any damage to the delivery contents.
Keep the damaged goods until the issue has been resolved.

3.

Check that the delivery is complete and nothing is missing.
 Compare the shipping documents with your order.

4.

Pack the product for storage and transportation in such a way that it is protectedagainst impact and moisture.
 The original packaging offers the best protection.
Make sure to comply with the permitted ambient conditions.

If you have any questions, please contact your supplier or your local Sales Center.

4.2

Product identification

Nameplates can be found:• On the inside of the door
• On the packaging (adhesive label, portrait format)

4.2.1

Nameplate

The nameplate provides you with the following information on your device:• Manufacturer identification• Order code
• Extended order code
• Serial number• Firmware version• Ambient and process conditions• Input and output values• Activation codes• Safety information and warnings• Certificate information‣ Compare the information on the nameplate with the order.
4.2.2

Product identification

Product pagewww.endress.com/CSF48
Interpreting the order code
The order code and serial number of your product can be found in the following locations:• On the nameplate• In the delivery papers

14

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Incoming acceptance and product identification

Obtaining information on the product1.

Go to www.endress.com.

2.

Page search (magnifying glass symbol): Enter valid serial number.

3.

Search (magnifying glass).
 The product structure is displayed in a popup window.

4.

Click the product overview.
 A new window opens. Here you fill information pertaining to your device,including the product documentation.

4.2.3

Manufacturer address

Endress+Hauser Conducta GmbH+Co. KG
Dieselstraße 24
D-70839 Gerlingen

4.3

Storage and transport

NOTICE
Damage to the sampler
If transported incorrectly, the roof may become damaged or tear off.
‣ Transport the sampler using a lifting truck or forklift. Do not lift the sampler by theroof. Lift it in the middle between the top and bottom sections.

4.4

Scope of delivery

The scope of delivery comprises:• 1 Liquistation CSF48 with:• The ordered bottle configuration• Optional hardware• Accessories kit
For peristaltic or vacuum pump:
Hose adapter for suction line with various angles (straight, 90°), Allen screw (for version
with vacuum pump only)• For sampling assembly:• 2 or 3 compressed air lines 5 m each, 1 sample line EPDM 13 mm ID 5 m• Accessory pack for peristaltic or vacuum pump
• Accessory pack for order options CSF48-AA31* and CSF48-AA32* (preparation forsampling assembly):• 1 printed copy of the Brief Operating Instructions in the language ordered• Optional accessories‣ If you have any queries:
Please contact your supplier or local sales center.

Endress+Hauser

15

Mounting

Liquistation CSF48

5

Mounting

5.1

Mounting requirements

5.1.1

Dimensions
625 (24.6)
471 (18.5)

753 (29.7)

A1258 (49.5)

903 (35.6)

A

125 (4.9)355 (14.0)625 (24.6)
471 (18.5)

816 (32.1)

753 (29.7)

A

530 (20.9)1403 (55.2)

1758 (69.2)

A

355 (14.0)

125 (4.9)

816 (32.1)
A0025857

8
A

16

Dimensions of Liquistation, plastic version, without/with stand. Unit of measurement mm (in)Suction line connection

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Mounting

743 (29.3)

AA

903 (35.6)

1297 (51.1)

624 (24.6)
467 (18.4)

125 (4.9)355 (14.0)

816 (32.1)

624 (24.6)
467 (18.4)

743 (29.3)

A

1403 (55.2)
530 (20.9)

1797 (70.8)

A

355 (14.0)

125 (4.9)

816 (32.1)
A0024423

9A

Endress+Hauser

Dimensions of Liquistation, stainless steel version, without/with stand. Unit of measurement mm (in)Suction line connection

17

Mounting

Liquistation CSF48

5.1.2

Installation site

For version with sample pump
1

2

3

4

A0024411

 10Liquistation mounting conditions

Mounting conditions
Route the suction line with a downward gradient to the sampling point.
Never mount the sampler in a place where it is exposed to aggressive gases.
Avoid siphoning effects in the suction line.
Do not route the suction line with an upward gradient to the sampling point.

Note the following when erecting the device:• Erect the device on a level surface.
• Connect the device securely to the surface at the fastening points.
• Protect the device against additional heating (e.g. heaters or direct sunlight).
• Protect the device against mechanical vibrations.
• Protect the device against strong magnetic fields.
• Make sure air can circulate freely at the side panels of the cabinet. Do not mount thedevice directly against a wall. Allow at least 150 mm (5.9 in.) from the wall to the left
and right.
• Do not erect the device directly above the inlet channel of a wastewater treatment plant.

18

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Mounting

For version with sampling assembly

3

4
2
1

A0024412

 11Installation conditions for Liquistation CSF48 with Samplefit CSA420 sampling assembly

Note the following when installing the sampling assembly in a pipe:• The best installation location is in the ascending pipe (pos. 2). Installation is also
possible in the horizontal pipe (pos. 1).
• Avoid installation in the down pipe (pos. 4).
• Avoid siphoning effects in the sample line.
• The minimum vertical distance between the assembly and the inlet of the sampler
should be at least 0.5 m (1.65 ft).
Note the following when erecting the sampler:• Erect the device on a level surface.
• Protect the device against additional heating (e.g. from a heating system).
• Protect the device against mechanical vibrations.
• Protect the device against strong magnetic fields.
• Make sure air can circulate freely at the side panels of the cabinet. Do not mount thedevice directly against a wall. Allow at least 150 mm (5.9") from the wall to the left andright.
• Do not erect the device directly above the inlet channel of a wastewater treatment plant.

Endress+Hauser

19

Mounting

Liquistation CSF48

5.1.3

Mechanical connection

61 (2.4)730 (28.7)
311 (12.2)

255 (10.0)DBA

355 (14.0)

A

C

C

137.4 (5.41)

AA

302 (11.9)

195.4 (7.69)

605 (23.8)

305 (12.0)

33.6 (1.32)

Foundation plan

214 (8.43)

786 (30.9)

A0024406

 12
A
B
C
D
---

Foundation plan. Unit of measurement mm (in)Fasteners (4 x M10)
Cable inlet
Outlet for condensate and overflow > DN 50
Sample supply from below > DN 80
Dimensions of Liquistation

5.1.4

Connection for sample intake and for version with sample
pump• Maximum suction height:• Vacuum pump: standard 6 m (20 ft) option 8 m (26 ft)• Peristaltic pump: standard 8 m (26 ft)• Maximum hose length: 30 m (98 ft)• Hose connection diameter• Vacuum pump: 10 mm (3/8 in) 13 mm (1/2 in) , 16 mm (5/8 in) or 19 mm (3/4 in)internal diameter• Peristaltic pump: 10 mm (3/8 in) internal diameter• Intake speed:> 0.6 m/s (> 1.9 ft/s) for 10 mm (3/8 in) ID, as per Ö 5893, US EPA> 0.5 m/s (> 1.6 ft/s) for ≤ 13 mm (1/2") ID, in accordance with EN 25667, ISO 5667
Note the following when erecting the device:• Always lay the suction line so that it slopes upwards from the sampling point to thesampler.
• The sampler must be located above the sampling point.
• Avoid siphoning effects in the suction line.

20

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Mounting

Requirements for the sampling point:• Do not connect the suction line to pressurized systems.
• Use the suction filter to impede coarse and abrasive solids and solids which can cause
clogging.
• Immerse the suction line in the direction of flow.
• Take the sample at a representative point (turbulent flow, not directly at the bottom of
the channel).
Useful sampling accessories
Suction filter:
Impedes coarser solids and solids which can cause clogging.

5.1.5

Connection for sample intake on version with sampling
assembly• Minimum height difference (sampling assembly to suction line gland): 0.5 m (1.6 ft)• Maximum hose length: 5 m (16 ft)• Diameter of hose connection: 13 mm (1/2 in)Note the following when erecting the device:• Always lay the sample line so that it slopes downwards from the sampling point to thesampler.
• The sampler must be located below the sampling point.
• Avoid siphoning effects in the suction line.
Requirements for the sampling point:• Connect the sampling assembly to pressurized systems with max. 6 bar (87 psi).
• Avoid sampling points with bigger, abrasive solids that could clog the system.
• Take the sample at a representative point (make sure the suction line is completely
submerged).

5.2

Setting up the device

5.2.1

Connecting the suction line at the side on version with pump

1.

When setting up the device, take the installation conditions into account.

2.

Route the suction line from the sampling point to the device.

3.

Fit a hose adapter on the hose.

4.

Secure the hose adapter with a worm drive hose clip.

5.

Screw the suction line onto the device's hose connection.

5.2.2

Connecting the suction line from below on version with pump

If the suction line is connected from below, the suction line is routed upwards behind therear panel of the sample compartment.

Endress+Hauser

1.

Remove the rear panel of the dosing compartment and sample compartment
beforehand.

2.

Remove the drain plug from the hose gland located at the back of the device base.

3.

Guide the suction line upwards and through the opening towards the front, as
illustrated.

21

Mounting

Liquistation CSF48

1

2

A0013704

 13
1
2

Sample supply from below

Gland for the suction line
Suction line

Connecting the suction line on version with vacuum pump

1

2
3

4

A0013708

A0013707

 14
1
2
3
4

Connecting the suction line from the side (as-delivered
state)

 15

Suction line connected from below

Hose
Fixing clip for hose glandThread adapter nut
Hose gland

Modification of the suction line from side connection to connection from below

22

1.

Unscrew the thread adapter nut (item 3).

2.

Unscrew the hose gland (item 4) from the side panel.

3.

Fit the hose gland in the fixing clamp (item 2) as illustrated.

4.

Screw the hose tight from above.

5.

Attach the hose adapter supplied to the suction line and screw it onto the hose glandfrom below.

6.

Insert the dummy plugs supplied.

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Mounting

Connecting the suction line on version with peristaltic pump

1
2
3
4

1

A0013705

 16
1
2
3
4

Connecting the suction line from the side (as-delivered
state)

A0013706 17

Suction line connected from below

Small thread adapter nut
Hose
Thread adapter nut
Hose gland

Modification of the suction line from side connection to connection from below
1.

Unscrew the thread adapter nut (item 3) and the hose gland (item 4) from the sidepanel.

2.

Unscrew the small thread adapter nut (item 1) and remove the hose.

3.

Fit a hose adapter on the hose.

4.

Secure the hose adapter with a worm drive hose clip.

5.

Connect the suction line from below as illustrated.

6.

Insert the dummy plugs supplied.

5.2.3

Connecting the compressed air and sample supply on version
with sampling assembly
5

6

7
1

2

1

Sampling assembly2

Sample line

3

Gland

4

Gland to distribution arm

5Compressed air hose for external
compressed air supply

6"Insert" compressed air line

7

"Retract" compressed air line

3
4

A0016593 18

1.

Endress+Hauser

Connection of compressed air and sample supply

Connect the sampling assembly (item 1) to the sample line (item 2) and guide thesample line into the gland (item 3). The sample line ends in the gland to the
distribution arm (item 4).

23

Mounting

Liquistation CSF48

2.

Connect the black compressed air lines from the sampler (item 6) to the connections
on the sampling assembly.

3.

In the case of the Liquistation CSF48 version without an internal compressor, connect
the black compressed air hose (item 5) to the external compressed air supply.

5.3

Sampling with a flow assembly

The sample is extracted either directly from the flow assembly which is installed in thebase or from an external flow assembly.
The flow assembly is used for sampling in pressurized systems e.g.:• Tanks positioned at a height• Pressure piping• Conveyance using external pumps
The max. flow rate should be 1000 to 1500 l/h.
1
2
3

1
2

Flow assembly inflow: ¾"
Sampling connection
Flow assembly outflow: 1¼"

3

A0013127

 19

Connections on flow assembly 71119408

The outlet of the flow assembly must be unpressurized (e.g. drain, open channel).
Application example: Taking samples from pressure piping
Use diaphragm valve 1 to set the flow rate to a
maximum of 1000 l/h to 1500 l/h. When thesampling cycle begins, one of the relay outputs canbe used to control and open ball valve 2. The
medium flows through the pipe and the flow
assembly and into the outflow. Once an adjustabledelay time has elapsed, the sample is taken directlyfrom the flow assembly. Ball valve 2 is closed again
once the sample has been taken.
The ball valve and the diaphragm valve are notincluded in the scope of supply. If necessary,please request a quote from your Endress+Hauser sales center.
A0023437

 20
V1
V2
3

Diaphragm valve
Ball valve
Flow assembly

5.4

24

Taking samples from pressure piping

Post-installation check1.

Verify that the suction line is securely connected to the device.

2.

Visually check that the suction line is installed correctly from the sampling point to
the device.

3.

Verify that the distribution arm is correctly engaged.
Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Mounting

4.

Endress+Hauser

Allow the sampler to rest for at least 12 hours after setup and before switching it on.
Otherwise you may cause damage to the climate control module.

25

Electrical connection

Liquistation CSF48

6

Electrical connection

LWARNING
Device is live!
Incorrect connection may result in injury or death!
‣ The electrical connection may be performed only by an electrical technician.
‣ The electrical technician must have read and understood these Operating Instructions
and must follow the instructions contained therein.
‣ Prior to commencing connection work, ensure that no voltage is present on any cable.
NOTICEThe device does not have a power switch‣ A fuse with a maximum rating of 10 A must be provided by the customer. Observe thelocal regulations for installation.
‣ Use a HBC fuse with 10 A, 250 V AC for samplers with a CSA approval‣ The circuit breaker must be a switch or power switch, and you must label it as thecircuit breaker for the device.
‣ The protective ground connection must be established before all other connections. If
the protective ground is disconnected, this can be a source of danger.
‣ A circuit breaker must be located near the device.
‣ For 24V versions, the power supply at the voltage source must be isolated from cables
carrying low voltage (110/230V AC) by double or reinforced insulation.
Operation with non-stationary mains cable connection to sampler (optional)
NOTICEThe device does not have a power switch‣ The mains switch can be ordered via a TSP modification.
‣ A fuse with a maximum rating of 10 A must be provided internally when operatingwith a power cable. The fuse can be mounted under the rear cover.
‣ The protective ground connection must be established before all other connections. If
the protective ground is disconnected, this can be a source of danger.

26

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Electrical connection

6.1

Connecting the sensors

6.1.1

Connection compartment in the controller housing

1

2

A0042244

A0012843

1
2
The controller housing has a separate connection
compartment. Release the six cover screws to open theconnection compartment:

1 E base module
Sampler controller

Display cover open, version with base module E‣ Release 6 cover screws with a Phillips screwdriverto open the display cover.

Endress+Hauser

27

Electrical connection

Liquistation CSF48

6.1.2

Description of base module SYS
1

BASE2-SYS

Ethernet

DisplaySD

Status

3

4

Int.Com

Service

62COM

24V DCPower

5

A0042245

 21
1
2
3
4
5
6

Base module SYS (BASE2-SYS)

SD card slot
Slot for display cable1)
Ethernet interface
Connecting cable to sampler controller1)
Voltage connection1)
Service interface1)1)Internal device connection, do not disconnect the plug.

28

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Electrical connection

6.1.3

Description of base module E
2

3
1
4
9
5
6
8
7

A0042273

 22
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

BASE2-E

Power supply for digital fixed cable sensors with Memosens protocol
SD card slot
Slot for display cable 1)
Ethernet interface
Service interface
Connections for 2 Memosens sensors
Current outputs
Socket for internal power supply cable 1)
Alarm relay connection

1) Internal device connection. Do not disconnect the plug!

6.1.4

Sensor types with Memosens protocol

Sensors with Memosens protocol
Sensor types

Sensor cable

Sensors

Digital sensors without
additional internal power
supplyWith plug-in
connection andinductive signaltransmission• pH sensors• ORP sensors• Combined sensors• Oxygen sensors (amperometric and optical)• Conductivity sensors with conductive measurementof conductivity• Chlorine sensors (disinfection)

Fixed cable

Conductivity sensors with inductive measurement ofconductivity

Fixed cable• Turbidity sensors• Sensors for interface measurement• Sensors for measuring the spectral absorption
coefficient (SAC)• Nitrate sensors• Optical oxygen sensors• Ion-sensitive sensors

Digital sensors withadditional internal power
supplyEndress+Hauser

29

Electrical connection

Liquistation CSF48

6.1.5
Connecting sensors with Memosens protocol‣ Sensor cable connected directly
Connect the sensor cable to the terminal connector of the 2DS, or of the BASE2-E
module.
In the case of a single-cannel device:
The left-hand Memosens input on basic module must be used!

6.1.6
Sensor connection‣ Guide the sensor cable via the rear panel to the controller housing towards the front.
→  45 and →  45
A0016360

 23

Gland to the controller

Only use terminated original cables where possible.

GY GNDYE Com B
GN Com A
WH –
BN +

EY/NG

A0024019

 24

30

Example of a Memosens CYK10 data cableEndress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Electrical connection

Connecting the ferrules of the sensor cable to the base module E‣ Ground the outer shield of the cable via the metal gland to the left of the base module

32 31

E.


A0028930

 25

6.2

Terminal strip

Connecting the sampler controller

The connections for the sampler controller are located in the controller housing (→  27).

6.2.1

Wiring the analog inputs and binary inputs/outputs

125 123 124 225 223 224

191 192 291292 145 146 245 246

1

2

A0042282 26
1
2

Endress+Hauser

Position of the terminals

Analog inputs 1 and 2
Binary inputs/outputs

31

Electrical connection

Liquistation CSF48

Analog inputs
**

In

Out

*

Gnd

**

In

Out

*

Gnd

6.2.2

125 123 124 225 223 224

21

A0012989

 27
*
**

Assignment of analog inputs 1 and 2

Analog input for passive devices (two-wire transmitter), Out + In terminals (125/123 or 225/223)
Analog input for active devices (four-wire transmitter), In + Gnd terminals (123/124 or 223/224)

CSXxx

CMxx
+

125

133
134
123

-

A0028652

 28With two-wire transmitter, e.g. Liquiline M CM42

CSXxx
FMU90 +

5

I out

I1

-

4

123

124
A0028653

 29

6.2.3

With four-wire transmitter, e.g. Prosonic S FMU90

Binary inputs

191 192 291 292 145 146 245 246

+

1

-

+

2

+

-

+

-

A0013381

 30
1
2

Assignment of binary inputs 1 and 2

Binary input 1 (191/192)
Binary input 2 (291/292)

+ 191

192
A0013404

 31

32

Binary input with external voltage source

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Electrical connection

When connecting to an internal voltage source, use the terminal connection on the rear ofthe dosing compartment. The connection is located on the lower terminal strip (on the far
left, + and -), (→  46)

6.2.4

Binary outputs

191 192 291 292 145 146 245 246

+

-

+

-

-

+
1

-

+
2

A0013382

 32
1
1

Assignment of binary outputs 1 and 2

Binary output 1 (145/146)
Binary output 2 (245/246)

+

- 146
+ 145
A0013407

 33

Binary output with external voltage source

When connecting to an internal voltage source, use the terminal connection on the rear ofthe dosing compartment. The connection is located on the lower terminal strip (on the far
left, + and -) (→  46)

Endress+Hauser

33

Electrical connection

Liquistation CSF48

6.3

Connecting the signal transmitter to the alarm relay

1
2

A0016343

 34
1
2

Relay

Binary output 1
Binary output 2

The left relay is activated with binary output 1, while the right relay is activated bybinary output 2.

11
12
14
A0016348

 35

34Connection example for binary output with relay

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Electrical connection

6.4

Connecting the communication

6.4.1

Connection conditions

31
32

250 ... 500 Ω

Via HART (e.g. via HART modem and FieldCare)

2
USB

1

3
A0039620

 36
1
2
3

HART using modem

Device module Base2-E: current output 1 with HART
HART modem for connection to PC, e.g. Commubox FXA191 (RS232) or FXA195 1) (USB)
HART handheld terminal

1) Switch position "on" (substitutes the resistor)

Via PROFIBUS DP
Master class 1(PLC, DCS)
Master class 2 (FieldCare, PDM)

TPROFIBUS DP(RS485)T

FXA291

Ethernet

A0039617

 37
T

Endress+Hauser

PROFIBUS DP

Terminating resistor

35

Electrical connection

Liquistation CSF48

Via Modbus RS485
Modbus Master / Gateway

T

Modbus RS485(RTU, ASCII)TFXA291

Ethernet

A0039615

 38
TModbus RS485

Terminating resistor

Via Ethernet: web server/Modbus TCP/PROFINET/Ethernet/IP
Ethernet client
FieldCare/
Webbrowser
Ethernet

FXA291

A0039616

 39

36

Modbus TCP or Ethernet/IP or PROFINET

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Electrical connection

6.4.2

Wiring cables at cable terminals

Plug-in terminals for Memosens and PROFIBUS/RS485 connections‣ Press the screwdriver against
the clip (opens the terminal).

‣ Insert the cable until the limit
stop.

‣ Remove the screwdriver (closes
the terminal).

After connection, make sure that every cable end is securely in place. Terminatedcable ends, in particular, tend to come loose easily if they have not been correctly
inserted as far as the limit stop.
All other plug-in terminals‣ Press the screwdriver against
the clip (opens the terminal).

‣ Insert the cable until the limit
stop.

‣ Remove the screwdriver (closes
the terminal).

After connection, make sure that every cable end is securely in place. Terminatedcable ends, in particular, tend to come loose easily if they have not been correctly
inserted as far as the limit stop.

 40

Endress+Hauser

Press the screwdriver
against the clip (opens theterminal) 41

Insert the cable until thelimit stop

 42

Remove the screwdriver(closes the terminal)

37

Electrical connection

Liquistation CSF48

Module 485DP

DIP switchon

T COM SF BF

PWR

6.4.3

1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128/SW
Service

Termi- DGND
nation
VP

82

96

96'

81

DP

95

95'
99'

99

A0050400
A0050399

 43

 44

ModuleWiringdiagram

Terminal

PROFIBUS DP

95

A

96

B

99

Not connected

82

DGND

81

VP

LEDs on front of module
LED

Designation

Color

Description

PWR

Power

GN

Supply voltage is applied and module is initialized.

BF

Bus failure

RD

Bus failure

SF

System failureRD

Device error

COM

Communication

YE

PROFIBUS message sent or received.

T

Bus termination

YE• Off = No termination• On = Termination is used

DIP switches on front of module
DIP

Factory setting

Assignment

1-128

ON

Bus address (→ "Commissioning/communication")OFF

Write protection: "ON" = configuration not possible via the bus, only via local
operationOFF

The switch has no function

Service38

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Electrical connection

Module 485MBon

DIP switch

T COM SF BF

PWR

6.4.4

1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128/SW
Service
82

96

96'

MB/RS485

Termi- DGND
nation
VP

95

81

MB/
RS485

95'

99

99'
A0050402

A0050401

 45

 46

ModuleWiringdiagram

Terminal

Modbus RS485

95

B

96

A

99

C

82

DGND

81

VP

LEDs on front of module
LED

Designation

Color

Description

PWR

Power

GN

Supply voltage is applied and module is initialized.

BF

Bus failure

RD

Bus failure

SF

System failureRD

Device error

COM

Communication

YE

Modbus message sent or received.

T

Bus termination

YE• Off = No termination• On = Termination is used

DIP switches on front of module
DIP

Factory setting

Assignment

1-128

ON

Bus address (→ "Commissioning/communication")OFF

Write protection: "ON" = configuration not possible via the bus, only via local
operationOFF

The switch has no function

ServiceEndress+Hauser

39

Electrical connection

Liquistation CSF48

Module ETHon

DIP switch

COM

SF

BF

PWR

Ethernet

6.4.5

1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128/SW
Service 47

Module 48

WiringdiagramLEDs on front of module
LED

Designation

Color

Description

RJ45

LNK/ACTGN• Off = Connection is not active• On = Connection is active• Flashing = Data transmission

RJ45

10/100YE• Off = Transmission rate 10 MBit/s• On = Transmission rate 100 MBit/s

PWR

Power

GN

Supply voltage is applied and module is initialized

BF

Bus failureRD

Not usedSF

System failureRD

Device error

COM

Communication

YE

Modbus message sent or received

DIP switches on front of module
DIP

Factory
setting

Assignment

1-128

ON

Bus address (→ "Commissioning/communication")OFF

Write protection: "ON" = configuration not possible via the bus, only via local
operation

OFF

If the switch is set to "ON" , the user settings for Ethernet addressing are saved
and connection settings programmed into the device at the factory are activated:
IP address=192.168.1.212, Subnet mask=255.255.255.0, Gateway=0.0.0.0,
DHCP=Off.
If the switch is set to "OFF" , the saved user settings are reactivated.

Service40

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Electrical connection

6.4.6

Bus termination

There are 2 ways to terminate the bus:
1. Internal termination (via DIP switch on module board)

"OFF"
"ON"

 49

DIP switch for internal termination‣ Using a suitable tool such as a tweezer, move all four DIP switches to the "ON" position.
 The internal termination is used.

VP

390 W
B/B'

 50

390 W

220 W

DGND

A/A'

Structure of internal termination

2. External termination
Leave the DIP switches on the module board in the "OFF" position (factory setting).

‣ Connect the external termination to terminals 81 and 82 on the front of module
485DP or 485MB for 5-V power supply.
 The external termination is used.

6.5

Connecting additional inputs, outputs or relays

LWARNING
Module not covered
No shock protection. Danger of electric shock!
‣ Change or extend the hardware for the non-hazardous area: always fill the slots from
top to bottom. Do not leave any gaps.
‣ If all of the slots are not occupied in the case of devices for the non-hazardous area:
always insert a dummy cover or end cover in the slot below the last module. This
ensures that the unit is shock-protected.
‣ Always ensure shock protection is guaranteed particularly in the case of relay modules(2R, 4R, AOR).
‣ Hardware for the hazardous area may not be modified. Only the Manufacturer'sService Team may convert a certified device to another certified device version. This
includes all modules of the transmitter with an integrated 2DS Ex-i module, as well aschanges that concern non-intrinsically safe modules.

‣ If additional shields are required, connect them with PE centrally in the control cabinet
via terminal blocks supplied by the customer.

Endress+Hauser

41

Electrical connection

Liquistation CSF48

6.5.1

Digital inputs and outputs

DIO module

47
48

+ 1
–

47 +
48

2

–

45 +
1
46 –
45 +
46 – 2
91 +

1
–
91 +
2
92
–
92

 51

Module 52

Wiringdiagram

A maximum of 2 optional DIO modules are supported

6.5.2

Current outputs

2AO

4AO

32

–

31+
32

31

+1

0/4 ... 20 mA

0/4 ... 20 mA

31

2

–

32

0/4 ... 20 mA
Module 54

Wiringdiagram 55

Module

 56

–

31 +
32
31

 53

+1

32

+3
–

31 +
32

2

–

4

–

Wiringdiagram

A maximum of 6 current outputs are supported.

42

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Electrical connection

6.5.3

RelaysModule 2R

Module 4R

41

Relay 142
43
41

Relay 2

Relay 2

Relay 1

41

42
43

42
43
41
42
43

Relay 4

Relay 341

 57

Module 58

Wiringdiagram 59

Module

 60

42
43
41
42
43
Wiringdiagram

A maximum of 4 relay outputs are supported.

Endress+Hauser

43Electrical connection

Liquistation CSF48

Example: Connecting the cleaning unit 71072583 for CAS40D
NOTICEPower consumption too high for the Liquiline alarm relay!
Can cause irreparable damage to the base module‣ Connect the cleaning unit only to terminals of an additional module (AOR, 2R or 4R),
not to the alarm relay of the base module.
Example: Connecting the Chemoclean CYR10 injector cleaning unit

1

L N PE

Relay 2

Relay 1

CM44x/CM44xR/
CM44P
41
42

CYR10
1
2
1
2

43
41

2

42
43

5
3
4
A0028598

 61
1
2
3
4
5

Connecting the CYR10 injector cleaning unit

External power supply
Cleaner to spray headContainer with cleaner
Motive water 2 to 12 bar (30 to 180 psi)
Backflow valve (to be provided by the customer)

6.6

Connecting the supply voltage

6.6.1
Laying the cable‣ Lay the cables so that they are protected behind the rear panel of the device.
• Cable glands (up to 8 depending on the version) are available for the cable entry.
• The cable length from the foundation to the terminal connection is approx.
1.7 m (5.6 ft).
• For analyzer stands, the cable length is approx. 1.8 m (5.9 ft) from the foundation.

6.6.2

Cable types• Power supply: e.g. NYY-J; 3-wire; min. 2.5 mm2• Analog, signal and transmission cables: e.g. LiYY 10 x 0.34 mm2
The terminal connection is protected under an additional cover in the top rear section of
the device.

‣ Therefore remove the rear panel of the device to connect the power supply before
commissioning.

The terminal cross-section must be at least 2.5 mm2 for devices with 24V power supply.
With 24V power supply, a current of up to 10A can flow. For this reason pay attention to44

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Electrical connection

the voltage drop on the supply line. The voltage at the device terminals must be within thespecified range (→  47) .

6.6.3

Removing the rear panel of the dosing compartment

1.

Open the dosing compartment door.

2.

Using an 5 mm (0.17 in) Allen key, release the rear panel by turning the lock
clockwise.


OPEN

CLOSE

1

A0012803

3.

1.
2.

A0012826 62

Lift up the upper rear panel and pull it off towards the back.
4.

Remove the rear panel.

6.6.4

Removing the rear panel of the sampling compartment

A0012825

1.

Endress+Hauser

Remove the bolt on the rear of the dosing compartment.

45

Electrical connection

Liquistation CSF48

2.

A0012824

Remove the bolt on the rear panel.

6.6.5

Removing the cover

LWARNING
The device is live!
Incorrect connection may result in injury or death‣ De-energize the device before you remove the cover of the power unit.
3.

1.
2.

A0012831

1.

Release the screw with an Allen key (5 mm).

2.

Remove the cover of the power unit from the front.

3.

When reassembling make sure that the seals are seated correctly.

6.6.6

Terminal assignment

The power supply is connected via plug-in terminals.

‣ Connect the ground to one of the ground connections.
Batteries and fuses are optionally available. →  211
Only use rechargeable batteries. →  211

46

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Electrical connection

3

+ + +

L

N

+

1
2

4

5

A0013237

 63
1
2
3
4
5

Terminal assignment

Assignment: 100 to 120 V/200 to 240 V AC ±10 %Assignment: 24 V DC +15/-9 %Rechargeable batteries (optional)Internal 24 V voltage
Fuses (only for batteries)

6.7

Special connection instructions

6.7.1

Terminal assignment for input/output signals

Input signals• 2 analog signals 0/4 to 20 mA• 2 binary signals > 100 ms pulse width or edge
Signals of digital sensors with Memosens protocol (optional)
Output signals
2 binary signals > 1 s pulse width or edge
The controller must be opened to connect the output and input signals.

6.8

Hardware settings

Setting the bus address
1.

Endress+Hauser

Open the housing.

47

Electrical connection

Liquistation CSF48

2.

Set the desired bus address via the DIP switches of module 485DP or 485MB.
For PROFIBUS DP, valid bus addresses are anything between 1 and 126, and anything
between 1 and 247 for Modbus. If you configure an invalid address, software
addressing is automatically enabled via the local configuration or via the fieldbus.
on offon off
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128

1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128

A0026776

 64

on offValid PROFIBUS address 67

1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128

A0026777

 65

Valid Modbus address 195

A0026778

 66

Invalid address 255 1)

1) Order configuration, software addressing is active, software address configured at the factory: PROFIBUS 126,

Modbus 247

6.9

Ensuring the degree of protection

Only the mechanical and electrical connections which are described in these instructions
and which are necessary for the required, designated use, may be carried out on the device
delivered.

‣ Exercise care when carrying out the work.
Individual types of protection permitted for this product (impermeability (IP), electricalsafety, EMC interference immunity, Ex protection) can no longer be guaranteed if, forexample :• Covers are left off• Different power units to the ones supplied are used
• Cable glands are not sufficiently tightened (must be tightened with 2 Nm (1.5 lbf ft) forthe permitted level of IP protection)• Unsuitable cable diameters are used for the cable glands• Modules are not fully secured• The display is not fully secured (risk of moisture entering due to inadequate sealing)• Loose or insufficiently tightened cables/cable ends
• Conductive cable strands are left in the device

48

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Electrical connection

6.10

Post-connection check

LWARNING
Connection errors
The safety of people and of the measuring point is at risk! The manufacturer does not
accept any responsibility for errors that result from failure to comply with the instructionsin this manual.
‣ Put the device into operation only if you can answer yes to all the following questions.
Device condition and specifications‣ Are the device and all the cables free from damage on the outside?
Electrical connection‣ Are the mounted cables strain relieved?
‣ Are the cables routed without loops and cross-overs?
‣ Are the signal cables correctly connected as per the wiring diagram?
‣ Are all plug-in terminals securely engaged?
‣ Are all the connection wires securely positioned in the cable terminals?

Endress+Hauser

49

Operation options

Liquistation CSF48

7

Operation options

7.1

Overview of operation options

7.1.1

Display and operating elements

EH_CSF
09:11:05 31.03.2015

1

1
2
3
4

LED
Display (with red display background in alarm
condition)
Navigator (jog/shuttle and press/hold function)
Soft keys (function depends on menu)

2
MODE

3

4
A0025501

 67

Overview of operation

7.2

Structure and function of the operating menu

7.2.1

Display1
2

1
2
3

Menu path and/or device designation
Status indicator
Assignment of soft keys, e.g.:
ESC: escape or abortion of a sampling process
MAN: manual sample?: Help, if available
MODE: switch the device to standby or cancel the
program

3
A0045688

 68

7.2.2

Display (example)

Configuration options

Display only
• You can only read the values but cannot change them.
• Typical read-only values are: sensor data and system information

50

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation options

Picklists• You receive a list of options. In a few cases, these also appear in the form of multiple
choice boxes.
• Usually you just select one option; in rare instances you select one or more options.
Numerical values• You are changing a variable.
• The maximum and minimum values for this variable are shown on the display.
• Configure a value within these limits.
Actions• You trigger an action with the appropriate function.
• You know that the item in question is an action if it is preceded by the following symbol:• Examples of typical actions include:• Deleting log entries• Saving or loading configurations• Triggering cleaning programs• Examples of typical actions include:• Start a sampling program• Start manual sampling• Saving or loading configurations•
User-defined text
• You are assigning an individual designation.
• Enter a text. You can use the characters in the editor for this purpose (upper-case andlower-case letters, numbers and special characters).
• Using the soft keys, you can:• Cancel your entries without saving the data ()• Delete the character in front of the cursor ( )• Move the cursor back one position ( )• Finish your entries and save ()Endress+Hauser

51

Operation options

Liquistation CSF48

Tables• Tables are needed to map mathematical functions or to enter irregular interval samples.
• You edit a table by navigating through rows and columns with the navigator andchanging the values of the cells.
• You only edit the numerical values. The controller automatically takes care of theengineering units.
• You can add rows to the table (INSERT soft key) or delete them (DEL soft key).
• Afterwards, you save the table (SAVE soft key).
• You can also cancel your entries any time using the  soft key.
• Example: Menu/Setup/Inputs/pH/Medium comp.

7.3

Access to the operating menu via the local display

7.3.1

Operating concept

The device is operated by:• Pressing the soft key: select the menu directly• Turning the navigator: move the cursor in the menu
• Pressing the navigator: launch a function• Turning the navigator: select a value (e.g. from a list)• Pressing the navigator: accept the new value

52

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation options

Example:

MODE

MODE

Press the soft key: select the menu directly

Turn the navigator: move the cursor in the menu

Menu/Language

MODE

Press the navigator: launch a function

Turn the navigator: select a value (e.g. from a list)

Menu/Language

MODE

Press the navigator: accept the new value

7.3.2

 New setting is accepted

Locking or unlocking operating keys

Locking operating keys

‣ Press the navigator for longer than 2 seconds
 A context menu for locking the operating keys is displayed.
You have the choice of locking the keys with or without password protection. "Withpassword" means that you can only unlock the keys again by entering the correct

Endress+Hauser

53

Operation options

Liquistation CSF48

password. Set the password here: MenuSetup/General settings/Extended setup/Data
management/Change key lock password‣ Select whether to lock keys with or without a password.
 The keys are locked. No more entries can be made. You will can see thein the softkey bar.

symbolThe password is 0000 when the device is delivered from the factory. Make sure tonote down any changes to the password, as otherwise you will not be able to unlock
the keypad yourself.
Unlocking operating keys

54

1.

Press the navigator for longer than 2 seconds
 A context menu for unlocking the operating keys is displayed.

2.

Select the Key unlock.
 The keys are unlocked immediately if you did not choose to lock with a password.
Otherwise you are asked to enter your password.

3.

Only if keypad is password-protected: enter the right password.
 The keys are unlocked. It is possible to access the entire onsite operation again.
The symbol is no longer visible on the display.

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

System integration

8

System integration

8.1

Integrating the sampler in the system

8.1.1

Web server

Versions without fieldbus: An activation code is required for the web server.
Connecting the web server‣ Connect the communication cable of the computer to the Ethernet port of the BASE2
module.

Base2

Web Browser

A0039619

 69

Web server/Ethernet connection

Establishing the data connection
All versions with the exception of PROFINET:
To ensure that your device has a valid IP address, you must disable the DHCP parameter inthe Ethernet settings. (Menu/Setup/General settings/Extended setup/Ethernet/
Settings)
You can assign the IP address manually in the same menu (for point-to-pointconnections).
All versions including PROFINET:
You will find the IP address and subnet mask of the device under: DIAG/System
information/Ethernet.
1.

Start your PC.

2.

First, configure a manual IP address in the network connection settings of theoperating system.

Example: Microsoft Windows 10

Endress+Hauser

3.

Open Network and Sharing Center.
 Apart from your standard network, you should see an additional Ethernet
connection (e.g. as an "unidentified network").

4.

Select the link to this Ethernet connection.

5.

In the pop-up window select the "Properties" button.

6.

Double-click "Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)".

7.

Select "Use the following IP Address".

8.

Enter the desired IP address. This address must be in the same subnet as the IP
address of the device, e.g.:
 IP address for Liquiline: 192.168.1.212 (as configured previously)
IP address for PC: 192.168.1.213.

55

System integration

Liquistation CSF48

9.

Start the Internet browser.

10. If you use a proxy server to connect to the Internet:
Disable the proxy (browser settings under "Connections/LAN settings").
11. Enter the IP address of your device in the address bar (192.168.1.212 in theexample).
 The system takes a few moments to establish the connection and then the CM44
web server starts. You might be asked for a password. The factory setting is"admin" for the user name and "admin" for the password.
12. Enter the following address(es) to download logbooks:
 192.168.1.212/logbooks_csv.fhtml (for logbooks in CSV format)
192.168.1.212/logbooks_fdm.fhtml (for logbooks in FDM format)
Downloads in FDM format can be securely transmitted, saved and visualized withEndress+Hauser's "Field Data Manager Software".
(→ www.endress.com/ms20)
The menu structure of the web server corresponds to the onsite operation.

A0026780

 70

Example of web server (menu/language=English)

Operation• Clicking a menu name or a function corresponds to pressing the navigator.
• You can make your settings conveniently via the computer keyboard.
Instead of using an Internet browser, you can also use FieldCare for configuration via
Ethernet. The Ethernet DTM required for this is an integral part of the "Endress+Hauser Interface Device DTM Library".
Heartbeat verification
You can also start Heartbeat verification via the web server. This has the advantage thatyou can view the results directly in the browser and can avoid using an SD card.
1.
2.

56

Open the menu: Diagnostics/System test/Heartbeat.
Perform verification.

3.

Either Verification results (quick display and export to SD card) or Additional
Functions (additional menu below the limit line ).

4.

Additional Functions/Heartbeat: Select the language of the pdf file.
 The verification report is displayed in the browser and can be printed out, saved
as a pdf file, etc.

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

System integration

8.1.2

Service interface

You can connect the device to a computer via the service interface and configure it using"FieldCare" . Furthermore, configurations can also be saved, transferred and documented.
Connection
1.

Connect the service connector to the interface on the Liquiline base module andconnect it to the Commubox.

2.

Connect the Commubox via the USB connection to the computer on which FieldCareis installed.

FieldCare
Service

FXA291

A0039618

 71

Connection overview

Establishing the data connection
1.

Start FieldCare.

2.

Establish a connection to the Commubox. To do so, select the "CDI Communication
FXA291" ComDTM.

3.

Then select the "Liquiline CM44x" DTM and start configuration.

You can now start online configuration via the DTM.
Online configuration competes with onsite operation, i.e. each of the two options blocks
the other one. On both sides it is possible to take away access from the other side.
Operation• In the DTM the menu structure corresponds to the onsite operation. The functions of theLiquiline soft keys are found in the main window on the left.
• Clicking a menu name or a function corresponds to pressing the navigator.
• You can make your settings conveniently via the computer keyboard.
• You can use FieldCare to save logbooks, make backups of configurations and transfer
configurations to other devices.
• You can also print out configurations or save them as PDFs.

8.1.3

Fieldbus systems

HART
You can communicate using the HART protocol via current output 1.
1.

Connect the HART modem or HART handheld terminal to current output 1(communication load 250 ‐ 500 Ohm).

2.

Establish a connection via your HART device.

3.

Operate the Liquiline via the HART device. To do so, follow the instructions in the
manual.
More detailed information on HART communication is provided on the product pages
on the Internet (→ BA00486C).

Endress+Hauser

57

System integration

Liquistation CSF48

PROFIBUS DP
With the Modbus modules 485DP or 485MB and the appropriate device version, you cancommunicate via PROFIBUS DP.

‣ Connect the PROFIBUS data cable to the terminals of the fieldbus module as described .
For detailed information on "PROFIBUS communication", see the product pages on theInternet (→ SD01188C).
ModbusWith the Modbus modules 485DP or 485MB and the appropriate device version, you cancommunicate via Modbus RS485.
You use the BASE2 module for Modbus TCP.
The RTU and ASCII protocols are available when connecting via Modbus RS485. You canswitch to ASCII on the device.

‣ Connect the Modbus data cable to the terminals of the fieldbus module (RS 485) or to
the RJ45 socket of the BASE2 module (TCP) as described.

For detailed information on "Modbus communication", see the product pages on theInternet (→ SD01189C).
EtherNet/IP
With the BASE2 module and the appropriate device version, you can communicate via
EtherNet/IP.

‣ Connect the EtherNet/IP data cable to the RJ45 socket of the BASE2 module.
For detailed information on "Ethernet/IP communication", see the product pages on
the Internet (→ SD01293C).
PROFINET
With the BASE2 module and the appropriate device version, you can communicate via
PROFINET.

‣ Connect the PROFINET data cable to the RJ45 socket of the BASE2 module.
For detailed information on "PROFINET communication", see the product pages on theinternet (→ SD02490C).

58

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Commissioning

9

Commissioning

9.1

Function check

LWARNING
Incorrect connection, incorrect supply voltage
Safety risks for staff and device malfunctions!
‣ Check that all connections have been established correctly in accordance with thewiring diagram.
‣ Ensure that the supply voltage matches the voltage indicated on the nameplate.
Saving displays as a screenshot
Via the local display, you can take screenshots at any time and save them to an SD
card.
1.

Insert an SD card into the SD card slot in the base module.

2.

Press the navigator button for at least 3 seconds.

3.

Select the "Screenshot" item in the context menu.
 The current screen is saved as a bitmap file to the SD card in the "Screenshots"
folder.

9.2

Setting the operating language

Configuring the language
If you have not already done so, close the housing cover and screw the device closed.
1.

Switch on the supply voltage.
 Wait for the initialization to finish.

2.

Press the soft key: MENU.

3.

Set your language in the top menu item.
 The device can now be operated in your chosen language.

9.3

Configuring the measuring device

9.3.1

Start screen

You can find the following menu items and soft keys on the initial screen:• Select sampling program• Edit program %0V 1)• Start program %0V1)• MENU• MAN• MEAS• MODE

1)"%0V" here stands for context-dependent text, which is automatically generated by the software and is used instead of %0V.

Endress+Hauser

59Commissioning

Liquistation CSF48

9.3.2

Display settings

Menu/Operation/Display
Function

Options

Info

Contrast

5 to 95 %Adjust the screen settings to suit your working
environment.

Factory setting
50 %Backlight

Selection
• On
• Off
• Automatic

Screen rotation

Backlight = Automatic
The backlighting is switched off automaticallyafter a short time if a button is not pressed. It
switches back on again as soon as you press thenavigator button.

Factory setting
Automatic

Backlight = On
The backlighting does not switch off
automatically.

Selection• Manual• Automatic

If Automatic is selected, the single‐channel
measured value display switches from one
channel to the next every second.

Factory setting
ManualCurrent program:

Read only

The name of the sampling program currently
selected is displayed.

StatusRead only

ActiveThe sampling program has been started and thedevice takes a sample as per the set parameters.
Inactive
No sampling program has been started, or aprogram that was running has been stopped.

Start

ActionMeasurement

Current measured values at the inputs are
displayed. Analog and binary inputs cannot be
modified here.

Show summary of current
program

The bottle statistics for the sampler are
displayed. The statistics appear for eachindividual bottle after the start of the program.
You can find more information in the Chap.
"Bottle statistics".

Show summary of inputs

9.3.3

The selected sampling program is started.

The configured counters of the analog andbinary input are displayed.
Max. 8 lines

User definable screens

Menu/Operation/User definable screens
Function

Options

Meas. screen 1 ... 6

Meas. screen

Info
You can create 6 measuring screens of your own
and give them a name. The functions are
identical for all 6 measuring screens.

Selection
• On
• Off

Once you have defined your own measuring
screen, you can switch it on here. You can findthe new screen under User definable screens.

Factory setting
Off
Label

Customized text, 20
characters

Name of the measuring screen
Appears in the status bar of the display.

Number of lines

1 to 8Specify the number of measured values
displayed.

Factory setting
8

60

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Commissioning

Menu/Operation/User definable screens
FunctionLine 1 ... 8
Source of data

Options

Info

User interface
Label

Specify the content of Label in the submenu ofeach line.

Selection• None• See list in "Info" column‣ Select a source of data.

Factory setting
None

Measured value
Source of data is an
input
Label
Set label to "%0V" 1)

1)

Selection
Depends on the input

You can choose from the following:• Sensor inputs• Heartbeat diagnostics of sensor inputs• Binary inputs• Current inputs• Temperature• Memosens sensor input (optional)• Fieldbus signals• Mathematical functions• Binary inputs and outputs• Current outputs• Relay• Measuring range switching

Factory settingNone

You can display different main, secondary andraw measured values depending on the type of
input.
No options can be selected for outputs here.

Customized text, 20
characters

User-defined name for the parameter to be
displayed

ActionIf you perform this action you accept theparameter name that is automatically suggested.
Your own parameter name (Label) is lost!

"%0V" here stands for text that depends on the context. This text is generated automatically by thesoftware and inserted in place of %0V. In the simplest situations, the generated text could be the name of
the measuring channel, for example.

9.3.4

Basic setup

Making basic settings
1.

Switch to the Setup/Basic setup menu.
 Make the following settings.

2.

Device tag: Give your device any name of your choice (max. 32 characters).

3.

Set date: Correct the set date if necessary.

4.

Set time: Correct the set time if necessary.

5.

Number of bottles: Correct the set number of bottles if necessary.

6.

Bottle volume: Correct the set bottle volume if necessary.
 For quick commissioning, you can ignore the additional settings for outputs etc.
You can make these settings later in the specific menus.

7.

To return to the display overview: press the soft key for ESC for at least one second.
 Your sampler now works with your basic settings. The sensors connected use thefactory settings of the sensor type in question and the individual calibration
settings that were last saved.

If you wish to configure your most important input and output parameters in the Basic
setup :‣ Configure the current inputs, relays, limit switches, cleaning cycles and device
diagnostics with the following submenus.

Endress+Hauser

61Commissioning

Liquistation CSF48

9.3.5

Sampling programs

Difference between program types
The following box provides an overview of the differences between the Basic, Standard andAdvanced program types.
Basic (1 sampling program)Start condition:• Immediate• Date/time• Immediate activation• Time-paced, volume-paced or
flow-paced (CTCV, VTCV, CTVV),
external signal,• Bottle change after time ornumber of samples, externalsignal• Bottle synchronization• Multiple bottles

Stop condition:• Program end• Continuous operation

Standard (1 sampling program with 1-5 sub-programs)
Start condition:• Immediate• Date/time• Volume• Immediate activation, individual
times, multiple times, interval,
deactivation of sub-program 1• Time-paced, volume-paced or
flow-paced (CTCV, VTCV, CTVV),
external signal• Bottle change after time ornumber of samples, externalsignal• Bottle synchronization• Multiple bottles

Stop condition:• Program end• Continuous operation• Date/time

Advanced (1 sampling program with 1-24 sub-programs)
Start condition:• Immediate• Date/time• Volume• External signal• Fieldbus

62• Immediate activation, individual
times, multiple times, interval,
event, external start,
deactivation of sub-program 1,
fieldbus• Time-paced, volume-paced or
flow-paced (CTCV, VTCV, CTVV),
single sample, sample table,
external signal, fieldbus• Bottle change after time ornumber of samples, externalsignal, fieldbus• Sample synchronization• Bottle synchronization• Multiple bottles

Stop condition:• Program end• Continuous operation• Date/time• Fieldbus

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Commissioning

Manual sampling
1.

Trigger manual sampling with the MAN soft key. This pauses any program currently
running.
 The current bottle configuration and the current sample volume are displayed.
You can select the distributor position. In the case of peristaltic systems, you canalso change the sample volume.
In the case of vacuum systems, a multiple of a single manual sample can be taken
under Multiplier. Specify the Multiplier range from 1 to 50.

2.

Select Start sampling.
 A new screen is displayed indicating the progress of the sampling process.

3.

After a manual sampling has been performed, press ESC to display and resume an
active program.
 The sample volume for "Manual sampling" is not taken into account in thecalculated bottle volumes.

Programming for automatic sampling
In the overview screen, create a simple sampling program under Select sampling
program/New/Basic or under Menu/Setup/Sampling programs/Setup program/New/
Basic:
1.

Enter the "Program name".

2.

The settings from the Basic setup for the bottle configuration and bottle volume aredisplayed.

3.

Sampling mode=Time paced CTCV is preset.

4.

Enter the Sampling interval.

5.

Enter the Sampling volume per sample. (For version with vacuum pump, configure
under Menu/Setup/General settings/Sampling.)

6.

Select the Bottle change mode after number of samples or time for average samples.
With the option "Bottle change after a time", you can enter the change time and bottle
synchronization (None, 1st bottle change time, 1st time of change + bottle number).
The description for this can be found in the "Bottle synchronization" section.
With the option "Bottle change after a time", you can choose the bottle
synchronization before the start condition (None, 1st bottle change time, 1st time ofchange + bottle number). The description for this can be found in the "Bottle
synchronization" section.

Endress+Hauser

1.

For Multiple bottles enter the number of bottles the sample should be distributed
over.

2.

Start condition: immediately or after date/time3.

Stop condition: after program end or continuous operation.

4.

Pressing SAVE saves the program and ends data entry.

63

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

10

Operation

10.1

Display

10.1.1 Measuring mode
‣ To display the measured values, press the soft key MEAS in the start screen, or during
operation press STAT under Measurement.

Press the navigator button to change the mode
There are various display modes:• Channel overview
The names of all the channels, the sensor type connected and the current main value aredisplayed.
• Main value of the selected channel
The name of the channel, the sensor type connected and the current main value aredisplayed.
• Main value and secondary value of the selected channel
The name of the channel, the connected sensor type and the current main value andsecondary value are displayed.
Temperature sensor 1 has a special function. The states of the compressor, ventilator
and heater are displayed (on/off).
• All the measured values of all the inputs and outputs
The current main value and secondary value as well as all the raw values are displayed.
• User-defined measuring screens
You configure what values you want to display. You can choose from all the measured
values of physical and "virtual" sensors (calculated using mathematical functions) andoutput parameters.
• Heartbeat diagnostics
Quick overview of the health of the device and of each connected sensor that supports
Heartbeat technology
In the first 3 modes, you can switch between channels by turning the navigator. In
addition to having an overview of all the channels, in the 4th mode you can also selecta value and press the navigator to see more details for the value. You can also findyour user-defined screens in this mode.
Heartbeat diagnostics(optional or with additional activation code)• Heartbeat diagnostics screen with graphic indicators for the health of the device andsensor and with a maintenance or (sensor-dependent) calibration timer• Heartbeat status information on the health of the device and the condition of the sensor→  65• : Sensor/device condition or maintenance timer > 20 %; no action is required• : Sensor/device condition or maintenance timer > 5 ≤ 20 %, maintenance not yet
urgent but should be scheduled• : Sensor/device condition or maintenance timer < 5 %, maintenance isrecommended• The Heartbeat sensor condition is the assessment of the calibration results and thesensor diagnostic functions.
An unhappy smiley can be due to the calibration result, the measured value status or tothe operating hours limit having been exceeded. These limits can be configured in thesensor setup in a way that adapts the Heartbeat diagnostics to the application.

64

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Heartbeat and NAMUR category
The Heartbeat status indicates the sensor or device condition while the NAMUR categories(F, C, M, S) assess the reliability of the measured value. The two conditions can correlate
but do not have to.
• Example 1• The number of remaining cleaning cycles for the sensor reaches 20% of the defined
maximum number. The Heartbeat symbol changes fromto . The measured value
is still reliable so the NAMUR status signal does not change.
• If the maximum number of cleaning cycles is exceeded, the Heartbeat symbol changes
from to . While the measured value can still be reliable, the NAMUR status signal
changes to M (maintenance required).
• Example 2
to and the
The sensor breaks. The Heartbeat status changes immediately from
NAMUR status signal also changes immediately to F (failure).

10.1.2

Device status

Icons on the display alert you to special device states.
Icon

Location

Description

Header bar

Diagnostic message "Failure"

Header bar

Diagnostic message "Maintenance request"

Header bar

Diagnostic message "Check"

Header bar

Diagnostic message "Out of specification"

Header bar

Fieldbus or TCP/IP communication active

Header bar

Hold active (for sensors)

At measured value
At measured value

1)

Hold for the actuator (current output, limit switch etc.) is active
1)

An offset has been added to the measured value

At measured value

Measured value in "Bad" or "Alarm" state

At measured value

Automatic temperature compensation active (for sensors)

At measured value

Manual temperature compensation active (for sensors)

Header bar

Simulation mode active or Memocheck SIM connected

At measured value

The measured value is influenced by a simulated value

At measured value

The displayed measured value is simulated (for sensors)

After the channel number

Heartbeat diagnostics: condition of sensor is good

After the channel number

Heartbeat diagnostics: condition of sensor is bad

After the channel number

Heartbeat diagnostics: condition of sensor is OK

Header bar

Controller is active

Only pH or ORP measurement

If two or more diagnostic messages occur simultaneously, only the icon for themessage with the highest priority is shown on the display (for the order of priority
according to NAMUR, →  160).

10.1.3

Assignment views

Assignment views, e.g. Channel assignment view, appear as the last function in many
sections of the menu. You can use this function to see which actuators or functions areconnected to an input or output. The assignments appear in hierarchical order.

Endress+Hauser

65

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

10.2

General settings

10.2.1

Basic settings

Some settings are visible with optional hardware only.
Menu/Setup/General settings
Function

Options

Info

Device tag

Customized text, 32
characters‣ Select any name for your controller, e.g. use

Temperature unit

the TAG name.

Selection
• °C
• °F
• K
Factory setting°C

Current output range

Failure current

Selection• 0..20 mA• 4..20 mA
Factory setting
4..20 mA

In accordance with Namur NE43, the linear
range is from 3.8 to 20.5 mA (4..20 mA) orfrom 0 to 20.5 mA (0..20 mA). If the range is
exceeded or undershot, the current value stops
at the range limit and a diagnostic message (460or 461) is output.
For HART communication, you must select 4..20mA .

0.0 to 23.0 mA

The function meets NAMUR NE43.

Factory setting
22.5 mA‣ Set the current value that should be output
at the current outputs in the event of anerror.

The value for Failure current should be outside the measuring range. If you decided that your Current
 output
range = 0..20 mA you should set an error current between 20.1 and 23 mA. If the Current
output range = 4..20 mA you could also define a value < 4 mA as the error current.
The device allows an error current within the measuring range. In such instances pay attention to any
effects this may have on your process.
Alarm delay

Device hold0 to 9999 s
Factory setting
0s

The software displays only the errors that arepresent longer than the set delay time. This
makes it possible to suppress messages that only
occur briefly and are caused by normal processspecific fluctuations.

Selection• Disabled• Enabled

You can enable an immediate, general hold (forsensors) here. The function acts in the same way
as the HOLD soft key in the screens.

Factory setting
Disabled

10.2.2

Date and time

Menu/Setup/General settings/Date/Time66

Function

Options

Info

Set date

Depends on the format

Editing mode:Day (two-digit): 01 to 31
Month (two-digit): 01 to 12
Year (four-digit): 1970 to 2106

Set time

Depends on the format

Editing mode:hh (hour): 00 to 23 / 0 am to 12 pm
mm (minutes): 00 to 59
ss (seconds): 00 to 59

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Menu/Setup/General settings/Date/Time
Function

Options

Info

Selection• DD.MM.YYYY• YYYY-MM-DD• MM-DD-YYYY‣ Select a date format.

Extended setup
Date format

Factory setting
DD.MM.YYYYTime format

Selection• hh:mm am (12h)• hh:mm (24h)• hh:mm:ss (24h)‣ Choose between 12-hour display or 24-hour
display. Seconds can also be displayed withthe latter version.

Factory setting
hh:mm:ss (24h)Time zone

Selection• None• Choice of 35 time zones

None = Greenwich Mean Time (London).

Factory setting
None
DST

Selection• Off• Europe• USA• Manual
Factory settingOff

10.2.3The controller adapts the summertime/normal
time changeover automatically if you choose
European or American daylight saving time.
Manual means that you can specify the start andend of daylight saving time yourself. Here, two
additional submenus are displayed in which you
specify the changeover date and time.

Hold settings

Menu/Setup/General settings/Hold settings
Function

OptionsInfo

0...600 s

The hold is maintained for the duration of thedelay time when you switch to the measuring
mode.

Settings automatic Hold
Hold release time

Factory setting
0s
Setup menu
Diagnostics menu

Selection• Disabled• Enabled
Factory setting
Disabled

Calibration active

Decide whether a hold should be output at thecurrent output when the particular menu is
opened.

Factory setting
EnabledIf a device-specific hold is enabled, any cleaning that was previously started is
stopped. You can only start a manual cleaning if a hold is active. The hold has noinfluence on the sampling.

10.2.4

Logbooks

Logbooks record the following events:• Calibration/adjustment events• Operator events• Diagnostic events• Programming events

Endress+Hauser

67

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

You define how the logbooks should store the data.
In addition, you can also define individual data logbooks .
1.

Assign the logbook name.

2.

Select the measured value to be recorded.

3.

Set the scan time (Scan time).
 You can set the scan time individually for every data logbook.
Further information on the logbooks: .

Menu/Setup/General settings/Logbooks
Function

Options

Info

Logbook ident

Customized text, 16
characters

Part of the file name when exporting a logbook

Event logbook

Selection• Off• Ring buffer• Fill up buffer

All diagnostic messages are recorded

Factory setting
Ring buffer

Fill up buffer
If the memory is full, there is an overflow,i. e.
you cannot store any new values. The controller
displays a corresponding diagnostic message.
The memory then has to be cleared manually.

Selection• Off• Ring buffer• Fill up buffer

All program cycles are recorded

Factory setting
Ring buffer

Fill up buffer
If the memory is 80 % full, the device displays adiagnostic message.
If the memory is full, there is an overflow, i. e. no
new values can be saved. The controller displays
a corresponding diagnostic message. The
memory then has to be cleared manually.

Selection
• Off
• On

‣ Decide whether you want to receive a

Logbook program

Ring buffer
If the memory is full, the most recent entry
automatically overwrites the oldest entry.

Ring buffer
If the memory is full, the most recent entry
automatically overwrites the oldest entry.

Overflow warnings
Event logbook = Fill up buffer
Calibration logbook
Diagnostic logbook
Configuration logbook

68

diagnostic message if the fill buffer of therelevant logbook overflows.

Factory setting
Off

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Menu/Setup/General settings/Logbooks
Function

Options

Info

Data logbooks
New

You can create a maximum of 8 data logbooks.

Logbook name

Customized text, 20
characters

Source of data

Selection• Sensor inputs• Heartbeat signals• Controller• Current inputs• Temperature• Fieldbus signals• Binary inputs• Mathematical functions‣ Select a data source for the logbook entries.
You can choose from the following:• Connected sensors• Available controllers• Current inputs• Fieldbus signals• Binary input signals• Mathematical functions

Factory setting
None
Measured value

Selection
You can record different measured values
Depends on Source of data depending on the data source.
Factory setting
None

Scan time

0:00:01 to 1:00:00
Factory setting
0:01:00

Data logbook

Overflow warnings
Event logbook =Fill up buffer

Minimum time interval between two entries
Format: H:MM:SS

Selection• Ring buffer• Fill up buffer

Ring buffer
If the memory is full, the most recent entry
automatically overwrites the oldest entry.

Factory setting
Ring buffer

Fill up buffer
If the memory is full, there is an overflow,i. e. no
new values can be saved. The controller displays
a corresponding diagnostic message. The
memory then has to be cleared manually.

Selection
• Off
• On

‣ Decide whether you want to receive adiagnostic message if the fill buffer of therelevant logbook overflows.

Factory settingOff
Add anotherlogbook

ActionOnly if you want to create another data logbook
immediately. You add a new data logbook at alater date using New.

Finished

ActionThis allows you to exit the New menu.

Start/stop
simultaneously

ActionAppears if you have created more than one datalogbook. With one mouse click, you can start orstop recording all the data logbooks.

Logbook name

The name of this submenu is based on the nameof the logbook and only appears once you havecreated a logbook.

 This menu appears several times if you have several data logbooks.

Endress+Hauser

69

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Menu/Setup/General settings/Logbooks
Function

Options

Info

Read onlyThis is for information purposes only. If you
want to record another value, delete this logbook
and create a new data logbook.

Read only

Displays the days, hours and minutes remaining
until the logbook is full.

Read only

Displays the number of entries remaining until
the logbook is full.

Logbook name

Customized text, 20
characters

You can change the name here again.

Scan time

0:00:01 to 1:00:00
Factory setting
0:01:00

As above
Minimum time interval between two entries
Format: H:MM:SS

Selection• Ring buffer• Fill up buffer

Ring buffer
If the memory is full, the most recent entry
automatically overwrites the oldest entry.

Factory setting
Ring buffer

Fill up buffer
If the memory is full, there is an overflow, i. e. no
new values can be saved. The controller displays
a corresponding diagnostic message. The
memory then has to be cleared manually.

Selection
• Off
• On

‣ Decide whether you want to receive a

Source of data
Measured value
Log time left
Event logbook =Fill up buffer
Log size
Event logbook =Fill up buffer

Data logbook

Overflow warnings
Event logbook =Fill up buffer

diagnostic message if the fill buffer of therelevant logbook overflows.

Factory setting
OffLine plotter
Axes

Menu to define the graphic display
Selection
• Off
• On

Should the axes (x, y) be displayed (On) or not(Off)?

Factory settingOn
Orientation

Selection• Horizontal• Vertical
Factory setting
Horizontal

X-Description
Y-Description
Grids
Pitches

Selection
• Off
• On
Factory settingOn

X Pitch/Grid distance

10 to 50%

Y Pitch/Grid distance

Factory setting
10 %RemoveActionYou can choose whether the value curves should
be displayed from left to right (Horizontal) orfrom top to bottom (Vertical). If you want todisplay two data logbooks simultaneously, makesure that both logbooks have the same settingshere.

‣ Decide whether a description should be

displayed for the axes and whether gridlines
should be shown. In addition, you can alsodecide whether pitches should be displayed.

‣ Determine the pitch.

This action removes the data logbook. Any datathat have not been saved are lost.

Example: New data logbook (Setup/General settings/Logbooks/Data logbooks/New)
1.

70

Make the settings:

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation• Logbook name
Assign a name. Example: "01".
• Source of data
Select a data source. Example: Sensor connected to channel 1 (CH1).
• Measured value
Select the measured value to be recorded. Example: pH value.
• Scan time
Specify the time interval between two logbook entries.
• Data logbook
Activate the logbook: specify the data storage method.
2.

../Finished: Perform the action.
 The device shows the new logbook in the list of data logbooks.

3.

Select data logbook "01".
 Additional display: Log time left.

4.

Only in the case of Fill up buffer:
Decide to set Overflow warning: On or Off.
 On: The device displays a diagnostic message in the event of memory overflow.

5.

Line plotter submenu: Specify the type of graphic representation.

10.2.5

Configuring the sampling depending on the device version

The list of functions displayed depends on the device version selected with:• Vacuum pump1)• Peristaltic pump2)• Distribution drive3)• Sampling assembly:4)
Menu/Setup/General settings/
Function

Options

Info

Number of bottles

Choice of all possible bottle
combinations

The bottle configuration you orderedis preset in the device.

Bottle volume

0 to 100000 ml

If continuous operation is selected fora sampling program, there is thedanger of overfilling the bottles. Do
not forget to empty the bottles!

Sampling

Factory setting
Depends on the bottle
configuration
Distribution parking3)

Selection• Back• NoneFactory setting
Back

Endress+Hauser

Causes the distribution arm to go to
the center at the back or remainparked in the current position when
the device is started or the program isended.

71

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Menu/Setup/General settings/
Function
Distribution reference

Options

Info

Selection• Pre sampling• Pre bottle change• Pre program start

The distribution arm goes through areference point depending on theoption selected.

Factory setting
Pre sampling

Pre sampling:
This means that the distribution arm
performs a reference test before eachindividual sampling.
Pre bottle change:
This means that the distribution arm
performs a reference test in every
subprogram.
Pre program start:
This means that a single reference
test is performed before the program
starts.

Power failure

Sample retries1), 2), 3)

Selection• Resume program• Stop program

Decide how the sampler should react
when it is energized after a power
failure.

Factory setting
Resume program

Resume program:• Time and flow-paced
The program calculates the omitted
samples and enters them in thelogbook as failed. When the
program is restarted, it continues
where it was interrupted.
• Flow-paced
No samples are entered in thelogbook during the power failure.
When the program is restarted, it
continues where it was interrupted.

0 to 3

If sampling is started and no sample isdrawn in, sampling can be repeated
up to 3 times.

Factory setting0
Sampling delay

0 to 99 s
Factory setting
0s

Liquid detection

Selection• Automatic• Semi automatic• Manual
Factory setting
Automatic

The start of the sampling cycle can bedelayed by up to 99 s. The binary
output is switched without any delay.
Automatic
The last intake time determined is the
new purge time.
Semi automatic
In Semi automatic purge times andintake times can be defined
separately.
ManualIn Manual the dosing time can also
be set.

Dosing volume 1), 4)

1) 20 to 350 ml

Factory setting
200 ml4) 10 to 1000 ml

Factory setting
200 mlConductive sensor 1)

Selection• Low sensitivity• Medium sensitivity• High sensitivity
Factory setting
Medium sensitivity

721)Adjust the dosing tube in the dosing

chamber to change the dosing
volume. The level in the bottle iscalculated using the set dosing
volume.
4)If the sampling assembly CSA420 isused, 10, 30 or 50 ml are the only
values that are permitted.
The switching behavior can be set
with the liquid detection function. Use
the high sensitivity setting if thesample has a low conductivity, forexample.

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Menu/Setup/General settings/
Function
Dosing chamber 1)

Options

Info

Selection• Dose without pressure (A)• Dose with pressure (B)Dosing with pressure e.g. in
conditions with low suction heights
and slight counterpressure or low
volumes.

Factory setting
Dose without pressure (A)Ext. program pause

Selection• None• Binary input 1• Binary input 2
Factory setting
NoneExt. sampling holdSelection• None• Binary input 1• Binary input 2
Factory setting
None

Liquid detection 2)

Selection• Automatic• Semi automatic• Off
Factory setting
Automatic

Binary input 1-2
Available only if the input isconfigured as an external signal.
If activated via an external input:• no samples are taken• sample requests are recorded in the
program logbook and logged as"nOK"• bottle levels are changed virtually• bottle changes are recorded
virtually and performed after the
break.
Binary input 1-2
Available only if the input isconfigured as an external signal.
If activated via an external input:• no samples are taken• no sample requests are recorded in
the program logbook• no bottle levels are changed• no bottle changes are recorded or
performed
If "Semiautomatic" is selected, thepurge times and intake times can be
defined separately.
Off:
The definition of the purge times andintake times is completely timecontrolled.
Automatic:
The last intake time determined is the
new purge time.
Semi automatic:
If the suction heights tend to vary
greatly.

Rinse cycles 2)

0 to 3
Factory setting
0

Safety interlock 2)(optional)

Selection
Off
Factory setting
Off

Samping time 4)

1 to 20 s
Factory setting
5s

Dosing time 4)

1 to 100 s
Factory setting
5s

Endress+Hauser

The suction line is rinsed with thesample up to 3 times.

If the peristaltic pump is opened, thesafety interlock stops all thefunctions.

Enter the time during which theinjected piston is located in thesample.
Enter the time until the sample isdosed.

73

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Menu/Setup/General settings/
Function
Dose with pressure (B) 4)

Options

Info

Selection
Dose without pressure (A)Semi automatic:
The sample is conveyed with pressure
from the sample compartment of theassembly into the sampler. Thisfunction is only possible if thecompressed air valve is connected tobinary output 1.

Factory setting
Dose without pressure (A)Time after sampling 4)(is only displayed if morethan one bottle is present)

5 to 100 s

Sample pre shots 4)(is only displayed if morethan one bottle is present)

5 to 10 s

Assembly cleaning 4)(is only displayed if morethan one bottle is present)

Selection• Off• with air• with water

Factory setting
5s

Factory setting
5s

Factory setting
Off

The time the tap waits in the bottle
position when dosing has finishedEnter the sample rinsing cycles withthe current sample.

Select the purge medium: airconnected to binary output 1 or water
connected to binary output 2.
WithOff the binary outputs can beused as in the standard version.

Diagnostics settings
Sensor fouling1)
Warning

0 to 10
Factory setting
7

Alarm

0 to 10
Factory setting
7

Indicates maintenance work must be
performed on the conductivity
sensors. If there is conductive foulingbetween the conductivity 1 andconductivity 2 electrode, a diagnostic
message is displayed when this levelof fouling is reached.
If there is conductive fouling between
the conductivity 1 and conductivity 2
electrode, a diagnostic message isdisplayed when this level of fouling isreached.

Pump tube life2)
Control

Selection
• Off
• On

Indicates the pump hose has to beexchanged.

Factory settingOn
Warning

10 to 50 h
Factory setting
30 h

Alarm

When the tube has been in operation
for this length of time, a diagnostic
message is displayed to indicate thatthe tube should be replaced in time.

10 to 50 h
Factory setting
30 hTotalizer

00-00:00 to 49710-06:28
Factory setting
00-00:00

Reset

ActionOperating time of the current pumphose in days, hours and minutes

The tube life counter is reset to 0:00
h.

Process sealing4)

74

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Menu/Setup/General settings/
FunctionControl

Options

Info

Selection
• Off
• On

Monitoring of the process seal

Factory settingOn
Warning

100 to 80000
Factory setting
50000

Alarm

50000 to 1000000
Factory setting
80000

Totalizer

Read only

Reset

ActionArmature lock postion4)

Enter the number of samples until awarning is issued.

Enter the number of samples until an
alarm is issued.

Settings for the sample totalizer

Assembly is set to the lock position.

Sample temperature (optional)
Temp. control

Selection
• Off
• On

Switch the temperature control of thesample compartment on or off here.

Factory setting
On
Sample temperature

2 to 20 °C
Factory setting
4 °C

Cooling control

Selection• Standard operation• Quick cool down

Set the sample compartment
temperature.

The temperature regulator is switched
off for a certain time if quick cooldown is selected.

Factory settingStandard operation
Defrosting
The automatic defrosting system is preset at the factory. The following menu items can only be viewed
and changed in the Expert mode.
Mode

Selection
• Off
• On

Configuration of the automatic
defrosting function

Factory setting
On
Interval

Selection• Hourly• Daily• Weekly• Monthly

Select the defrosting interval

Factory setting
HourlyTime00-01:00 to 00-23:59
Factory setting
00-04:00

Duration

00:01 to 02:00
Factory setting
00:05

Endress+Hauser

75

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

10.2.6

Extended setup

Diagnostics settings
The list of diagnostic messages displayed depends on the path selected. There are devicespecific messages, and messages that depend on what sensor is connected.
Menu/Setup/(General settings or Inputs<Sensor channel>)/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag.
behavior
Function

OptionsInfo‣ Select the message to be changed. Only then

List of diagnostic messages

is it possible to make the settings for thismessage.

Diag. code

Read only

Diagnostic message

Selection
• On
• Off
Factory setting
Depends on the message

Failure current

Deactivate the diagnostic message or activate itagain.
Deactivating means:• No error message in the measuring mode
• No failure current at the current output

Selection
• On
• Off

‣ Decide whether a failure current should be

Factory setting
Depends on the message

the event of general device errors, the Infailure
current is output at all the current

output at the current output if the diagnostic
message display is activated.

outputs. In the event of channel-specificerrors, the failure current is only output at
the assigned current output.
Status signal

Selection• Maintenance (M)• Out of specification (S)• Function check (C)• Failure (F)The messages are divided into different error
categories in accordance with NAMUR NE 107.

‣ Decide whether a status signal assignment
should be changed for the application.

Factory setting
Depends on the message
Diag. output

Selection• None• Alarm relay• Binary output• Relay 1 to n (depends onthe device version)
Factory setting
None

Select a relay output and/or binary output towhich the diagnostic message should be
assigned.
For sensors with the Memosens protocol: A relay
output must first be configured for Diagnostics
before it is possible to assign the message to an
output.
(Menu/Setup/Outputs: Assign the Diagnostics
function and set Operating mode to as
assigned.)

 Alarm relays are available, depending on the device version.
Cleaning program

Selection• None• Cleaning 1• Cleaning 2• Cleaning 3• Cleaning 4‣ Decide whether the diagnostic message
should trigger a cleaning program.

The cleaning programs can be defined under:
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning.

Factory setting
None
Detail information

76

Read only

Additional information on the diagnostic
message and instructions on how to resolve theproblem.

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

HART bus address
The list of diagnostic messages displayed depends on the path selected. There are devicespecific messages, and messages that depend on what sensor is connected.
Menu/Setup/General settings/Extended setup/HART
Function

OptionsInfo

Bus address

0 to 63

You can change the device address to integrate
several HART devices in a single network(Multidrop mode).

Factory setting0

If you reset the device to the factory settings (Diagnostics/Reset/Factory default),
the bus address is not reset. Your setting is retained.
PROFIBUS DP
Menu/Setup/General settings/Extended setup/PROFIBUS
Function

Options

Info

EnableSelection
• Off
• On

You can switch off communication at this point.
The software can then only be accessed via local
operation.

Factory settingOn
Termination

Read only

If the device is the last in the bus, you canterminate via the hardware.

Bus address

1 to 125

If you have addressed the bus via hardware (DIP
switches on the module, ), you can only read theaddress here.
If an invalid address is set via the hardware, youhave to assign a valid address for your device
either here or via the bus.

Ident number

Selection• Automatic• PA-Profile 3.02 (9760)• Liquistation CSFxx(155C)• Manufacturer specific
Factory setting
Automatic

ModbusMenu/Setup/General settings/Extended setup/Modbus
Function

Options

Info

EnableSelection
• Off
• On

You can switch off communication at this point.
The software can then only be accessed via local
operation.

Factory settingOn
Termination

Endress+Hauser

Read only

If the device is the last in the bus, you canterminate via the hardware.

77

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Menu/Setup/General settings/Extended setup/Modbus
Function

Options

Info

Selection
• TCP
• RTU
• ASCII

The transmission mode is displayed dependingon the version ordered.
In the case of RS485 transmission, you canchoose between RTU and ASCII . There are no
choices for Modbus-TCP.

Settings
Transmission mode

Factory setting(Modbus-RS485 only)
RTU
Baudrate
Modbus-RS485 only

Selection• 1200• 2400• 4800• 9600• 19200• 38400• 57600• 115200
Factory setting
19200

ParityModbus-RS485 only

Selection• Even (1 Stopbit)• Odd (1 Stopbit)• None (2 Stopbit)
Factory setting
Even (1 Stopbit)

Byte order

Selection• 1-0-3-2• 0-1-2-3• 2-3-0-1• 3-2-1-0
Factory setting
1-0-3-2

Watchdog

0 to 999 s
Factory setting
5s

If no data transmission takes place for longer
than the time set, this is an indicator that
communication has been interrupted. After thistime, input values received via the Modbus are
considered to be invalid.

EtherNet/IP
If PROFINET is used, the settings in this menu are read only settings. The network
settings are made via the PROFINET-DCP protocol.
For detailed information on "PROFINET communication", see the product pages on theinternet (→ SD02490C).

78

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Menu/Setup/General settings/Extended setup/Ethernet
Function

Options

Info

EnableSelection
• Off
• On

You can switch off communication at this point.
The software can then only be accessed via local
operation.

Factory settingOn
Settings
Link settings

Selection• Auto negotiation• 10MBps half duplex• 10MBps full duplex• 100MBps half duplex• 100MBps full duplex
Factory setting
Auto negotiation

DHCP

Selection
• Off
• On
Factory setting
On

Transmission methods of the communication
channels• Full duplex:
Data can be transmitted and received
simultaneously.
• Half-duplex:
Data can be transmitted and received on analternating basis only, i.e. not simultaneously.
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol(DHCP) makes it possible to assign the network
configuration to clients via a server. With DHCP,
it is possible to automatically integrate thedevice into an existing network without the needfor manual configuration. Normally only theautomatic assignment of the IP address must be
configured at the client. During startup, the IP
address, the netmask and the gateway are
retrieved from a DHCP server.
you want to assign the IP address of the Dodevice manually? If so, you have to set
DHCP = Off.

Endress+Hauser

IP-Address

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

An IP address is an address in computer
networks which are based on the Internet
protocol (IP).
You can only set the IP address if DHCP isswitched off.

Netmaskxxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

On the basis of the IP address of a device, thenetmask specifies which IP addresses this device
searches for in its own network and which
addresses it could access in other networks via arouter. It therefore divides the IP address into a
network part (network prefix) and a device part.
The network part must be identical for all
devices in the individual network, and the device
part must be different for every device within the
network.

Gatewayx.x.x.x

A gateway (protocol converter) enables
communication between networks that are
based on completely different protocols.

Service switch

Read only

MAC-Address

Read only

The MAC address (Media Access Control
address) is the hardware address of every
individual network adapter which is used touniquely identify the device in a computer
network.

EtherNetIP Port 44818

Read only

A port is a part of an address which assigns data
segments to a network protocol.

79

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Accepting settings
Have you changed settings manually, such as the IP address?

‣ Before you leave the Ethernet menu:
select SAVE to apply your settings.
 In the DIAG/System information menu you can check whether the new settings
are used.
Web server
Menu/Setup/General settings/Extended setup/Webserver
Function

Options

Info

Webserver

Selection
• Off
• On

You can switch off communication at this point.
The software can then only be accessed via local
operation.

Factory setting
On
Webserver TCP port 80

Read only

The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) is anarrangement (protocol) as to how data should beexchanged between computers. A port is a partof an address which assigns data segments to a
network protocol.

Webserver login

Selection
• Off
• On

You can switch user administration on and off at
this point. This makes it possible to create
multiple users with password access.

Factory settingOn
User administration
List of users alreadycreatedView/edit

You can change user names or passwords ordelete users. A user is already created at thefactory: "admin" with password "admin".

Name

Free text

Create new user

Enter new user password

Free text

1.

INSERT .

Confirm new user
password

Free text

2.

Assign any name to the new user.

3.

Select a password for the user.

Change user password

Free text

4.

Confirm password.
 You can now change the password at
any time.

New user:

Data management
Firmware update
Please contact your local sales office for information on firmware updates available
for your controller and its compatibility with earlier versions.
Current firmware version : Menu/Diagnostics/System information.

‣ Back up your current setup and your logbooks to an SD card.
To install a firmware update, you must have the update available on an SD card.

80

1.

Insert the SD card into the controller card reader.

2.

Go to Menu/Setup/General settings/Extended setup/Data management/
Firmware update.
 The update files on the SD card are displayed.

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation3.

Select the desired update and select yes when asked the following:
The current firmware will be overwritten.
After this the device will reboot.
Do you want to proceed?
 The firmware is loaded and the device is then started with the new firmware.

Saving the setup
Saving a setup offers the following advantages, among others :• Copying settings for other devices• Quick and easy switching between various setups, e. g. for different user groups or forrecurring sensor type changes• Restoring a tried-and-tested setup, e. g. if you have changed a lot of settings and nolonger know what the original settings were1.

Insert the SD card into the controller card reader.

2.

Go to Menu/Setup/General settings/Extended setup/Data management/Savesetup .

3.

Name: Assign a file name.

4.

Then select Save .
 If you have already assigned the file name, you will be asked whether you want to
overwrite the existing setup.

5.

Use OK to confirm or cancel and assign a new file name.
 Your setup is stored on the SD card and you can upload it quickly to the device at
a later date.

Loading the setup
When you load a setup, the current configuration is overwritten.
1.

Insert the SD card into the controller card reader. A setup must have been saved to
the SD card.

2.

Go to Menu/Setup/General settings/Extended setup/Data management/Loadsetup .
 A list of all the setups on the SD card is displayed.
An error message is displayed if there is no valid setup on the card.

3.

Select the desired setup.
 A warning is displayed:
The current parameters will be overwritten and the device will reboot.
Warning: Please note that cleaning and controller programs can be active.
Do you want to proceed?

4.

Use OK to confirm or cancel.
 If you select OK to confirm, the device restarts with the desired setup.

Exporting the setup
Exporting a setup offers the following advantages, among others:• Export in XML format with a stylesheet for formatted display in an XML-compatible
application, such as . Microsoft Internet Explorer• Importing the data (drag and drop the XML file into a browser window)

Endress+Hauser

1.

Insert the SD card into the controller card reader.

2.

Go to Menu/Setup/General settings/Extended setup/Data management/Export
setup .

3.

Name: Assign a file name.

81Operation

Liquistation CSF48

4.

Then select Export .
 If you have already assigned the file name, you will be asked whether you want to
overwrite the existing setup.

5.

Use OK to confirm or cancel and assign a new file name.
 Your setup is saved on the SD card in the "Device" folder.
You cannot upload the exported setup to the device again. You must use the Save
setup . This is the only way you can save a setup to an SD card and reload it later on or
upload it to other devices.

Activation code
Activation codes are required for:
• Additional functions• Firmware upgrades• Modifications, e.g. deactivation of fieldbus protocols
If the original device has activation codes, these can be found on . The corresponding
device functions are activated at the factory. Codes are only required if servicing thedevice or deactivating fieldbus protocols.
1.

Enter the activation code: Menu/Setup/General settings/Extended setup/Data
management/Activation code.

2.

Confirm your entry.
 The new hardware or software function is activated and can be configured.

Functions that are enabled by an activation code:
Function

Activation code beginning with

Second Memosens input
Fieldbus deactivation when removing module 485DP/485MB

0B0...

2 current outputs (BASE2-E module only)

081...

Web server 2) 3)

351...

HART

0B1...

PROFIBUS DP

0B3...

3)

0B8...

Modbus RS485

0B5...

3)

0B9...

Modbus TCP

EtherNet/IP
PROFINET

0B7...

Feedforward control

220...

Chemoclean Plus

25...

4)

321...

FormulaHeartbeat monitoring

2D1...

Heartbeat verification

2E1...

1)

2)
3)
4)

82

062...
1)

If module 485DP/485MB is removed with the fieldbus protocol activated, the device outputs an error
message. Enter the activation code from the inside nameplate. The fieldbus is only deactivated once you do
this. The appropriate activation code must then be entered to activate current outputs of the base module.
Additional current outputs (CM444R and CM448R only) are activated as soon as the corresponding
module is used.
Via Ethernet socket of the BASE2 module, for versions without an Ethernet fieldbus
Mathematical function

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

10.3

Programming

The following box provides an overview of the differences between the Basic, Standard andAdvanced program types.
Basic (1 sampling program)Start condition:• Immediate• Date/time• Immediate activation• Time-paced, volume-paced or
flow-paced (CTCV, VTCV, CTVV),
external signal,• Bottle change after time ornumber of samples, externalsignal• Bottle synchronization• Multiple bottles

Stop condition:• Program end• Continuous operation

Standard (1 sampling program with 1-5 sub-programs)
Start condition:• Immediate• Date/time• Volume• Immediate activation, individual
times, multiple times, interval,
deactivation of sub-program 1• Time-paced, volume-paced or
flow-paced (CTCV, VTCV, CTVV),
external signal• Bottle change after time ornumber of samples, externalsignal• Bottle synchronization• Multiple bottles

Stop condition:• Program end• Continuous operation• Date/time

Advanced (1 sampling program with 1-24 sub-programs)
Start condition:• Immediate• Date/time• Volume• External signal• Fieldbus

10.3.1

Stop condition:• Program end• Continuous operation• Date/time• Fieldbus

Overview of the possible program types

Sampling mode

Vacuum/peristaltic pump,Endress+Hauser• Immediate activation, individual
times, multiple times, interval,
event, external start,
deactivation of sub-program 1,
fieldbus• Time-paced, volume-paced or
flow-paced (CTCV, VTCV, CTVV),
single sample, sample table,
external signal, fieldbus• Bottle change after time ornumber of samples, externalsignal, fieldbus• Sample synchronization• Bottle synchronization• Multiple bottles

Basic program type

Standard program type

Advanced program typeTime-paced

Time-paced

Time-paced

Flow-paced

Flow-paced

Flow-paced
Single sample

83

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Sampling mode

Basic program type

Standard program type

Sampling assembly

Advanced program type
Sampling table

External signal

External signal

External signal
Fieldbus (optional)

Peristaltic pump

Flow proportional
sampling/timeoverride (CTVV)

Flow proportional
sampling/time override(CTVV)

Flow proportional
sampling/time override(CTVV)The graphic below explains the various ways sampling can be controlled on the basis of aflow curve:
a

b

a.

Flow curveb.

Time-proportional sampling (CTCV)
A constant sample volume (e.g. 50 ml) is taken at regularintervals (e.g. every 5 min).

c.

Volume-proportional sampling (VTCV)A constant sample volume is taken at variable intervals(depending on the inflow volume).

d.

Flow-proportional sampling (CTVV)
A variable sample volume (the sample volume depends on theflow rate) is taken at regular intervals (e.g. every 10 min).

e.

Event-controlled sampling
Sampling is triggered by an event (e.g. pH limit value). Sampling
can be time-paced, volume-paced or flow-paced, or single
samples can be taken.

c

d

e

A0014045

 72
Q
t

84

Sampling control

Flow
Time

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

The following table explains the various types of sampling using specific examples.
Type of sampling

ExampleTime-paced• Sampling interval: 5 min• Sampling volume: 50 ml• Bottle change mode: 2 hFlow-paced

Controlled via current input• Signal: 0 to 20 mA = 0 to 600 m3/h
• Sampling interval: 5 min• Sampling volume: 50 ml• Bottle change mode: 2 hThis type of sampling remains
constant over time and does nottake changes in flow or
polluting load into account. It is
With this setting, a 50 ml sample is taken
possible to take aevery 5 minutes. 12 samples are thus taken
every hour. Each bottle is filled over a period of representative sample if the
2 hours. This results in a total sampling volume intervals are brief (e.g. 5 min).
of 24 samples per bottle x 50 ml = 1200 ml.

If 20 mA = 600 m3/h, a sample is taken every
two minutes (smallest sampling interval withmaximum flow rate). The total number ofsamples amounts to 60 samples per bottle.
With a flow rate of 300 m3/h, a sample istaken every four minutes.
Controlled via binary input• Signal pulse: 5 m• Sampling interval: 5 min• Sampling volume: 50 ml• Bottle change mode: 2 h
The pulses are scaled at the flowmeter. By
multiplying the pulses at the sampling interval,
the shortest sampling interval at the maximum
pulse frequency can be set. Example: With amaximum flow rate of 600 m3/h, the pulse
frequency at 5 m3 is 120 pulses/h or 2 pulses/
min. With a sampling interval of 20 m3, asample is taken after 4 pulses = 2 minutes.

Endress+Hauser

Info• The current inputs can be
configured for the current
range of 0 to 20 mA or 4 to
20 mA.
• The binary inputs require
power (24 V DC) for floating
contacts.
In the case of flow-paced
sampling, the sampling interval
is calculated on the basis of thevolume flow. The same
sampling volume is take atvariable intervals.
Advantage:
Good, representative results inthe event of minor fluctuationsin flow.
Disadvantage:
Longer intervals when the levelof water is low mean thatmalfunctions cannot be
detected.

85

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Type of sampling

ExampleInfo

Time/flow-paced (onlypossible with peristalticpump) Time/flow-paced

Controlled via current input• Signal: 0 to 20 mA• Sampling interval: 10 min• Sampling volume: variable

Samples are taken at set
intervals with a variablesampling volume. The sampling
volume is calculated from theflow rate. More volume isgrabbed when the flow is highthan when it is low. Since theflow normally fluctuates andthe maximum flow is only
rarely a constant variable, thesampling volume transferred tothe container will depend on
the daily average.

The maximum sampling volume is defined at
the maximum flow rate. Example: The
maximum flow rate at 20 mA at the current
input is 160 l/s, and the maximum sampling
volume is 200 ml. When transferring samples
into a 30l mixed sample container, 144
samples are taken per day with a maximum
sampling volume of 28.8 l. With a flow rate of
80 l/s, a sampling volume of only 100 ml
would be grabbed, and a sampling volume of
50 ml would be grabbed at a flow rate of 40 l/s.
The sampling volume is always calculated
based on the flow.
Controlled via binary input• Binary input (pulse per flow unit)• Sampling interval: 10 min• Sampling volume:variable
The sampling volume is defined for a flow
pulse, e.g.: 1 pulse is 20 ml. For instance, if 5
flow pulses are counted between the samplingintervals, this results in a sampling volume of 5
x 20 = 100 ml, and a volume of 8 x 20 = 160
ml for 8 pulses. If a binary input is used fortime/flow-paced sampling, the sampling
volume is calculated per sample as apercentage of the specified sampling volume.

Advantage:
Very good, representative
sampling given large
fluctuations in the flow andconstant time intervals.
Disadvantage:
Too little sampling volume ismade available for analysis
when the flow is low.
Advantage with current input:
For the sampling interval,
either the current flow rate or
the average value between thelast and current flow rate isused to calculate the exact
sampling volume (dependingon the presetting).
Disadvantage with binary
input:For the sampling interval, thepulses counted since the last
sampling are multiplied by a
volume. If this is too high - e.g.
100 ml - the composition of thesample is not representative foranalysis.

Event

Event-based sampling is controlled via thecurrent input, binary input and/or sensor input.
The subprogram created waits to be activatedby an event that can consist of up to 3
individual events. Every possible condition canbe created using logical "and" / "or" links. For
example, the information from a flowmeter
connected to the current input can be linked toa rain gage and a pH sensor signal connected tothe binary input. An event is defined as limit
value violation (exceeded or undershot), range
monitoring within or outside a range, or a rateof change. Users can decide whether additional
sampling is started when the event starts
and/or ends. For the duration of the event,users can choose from time-paced, flow-paced
or time/flow-paced sampling, or can takesingle samples, use a sampling table or theexternal control system.

The sampler waits for an event.
This event takes place via
internal sensor signal
processing or via devices
connected externally. As bottle
assignment is possible whenusing several bottles, events
can be assigned to individual
bottles. A maximum of 24
subprograms can be started
simultaneously and assigned toindividual bottles.

Bottle synchronization
The bottle synchronization setting is possible with all types of program. In addition, bottle
synchronization can be switched via an external signal. Bottle synchronization is only
possible with a bottle change after a specific time and not with a bottle change after anumber of samples.
86

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Specific bottles can be assigned specific filling times with the bottle synchronization
function. For example, bottle 1 is to be filled from midnight to 2 a.m., bottle 2 from 2 a.m.
to 4 a.m. etc.. The following options are available for this:• None:The sampling and bottle change times are not synchronized.
• 1. bottle change time:
Sampling starts with the first bottle. The change to the next bottle is synchronized. For
example, a time of 2 hours was set for bottle changeover, and 00:00 was set for thesynchronization. If the program is started at 5:23 a.m., for example, bottle 1 is initiallyfilled. The system switches for the first time to bottle 2 at midnight (00:00), to bottle 3
at 2 a.m. etc.
• Time of change + bottle number: A specific filling time is assigned to every bottle.
E.g.: 00:00 to 02:00: bottle 1;
02:00 to 04:00: bottle 2;
04:00 to 06:00: bottle 3, etc.
If the program is started at 10:00, for example, the device starts by filling bottle 6.
It is also possible to start synchronization on a specific day of the week. For example, atime of 24 hours was set for bottle changeover, Monday 00:00 was the time set forsynchronization, and Tuesday 8 a.m. was set for starting the program. The system fills
bottle 2 until 00:00 on Wednesday and then switches to bottle 3.
• External signal:
The system changes to the next bottle when an external signal is received. The externalsignal first has to be configured via the binary input. The binary input can then be
selected as the source.
In the Standard and Advanced program, the bottle position is not currently restored
following a power failure.

10.3.2

Program type: BasicWith the Basic program type, you can create simple sampling programs quickly based ontime, volume and flow.
In the case of volume- and flow-controlled sampling, the inputs must be configured
appropriately beforehand. If you want to create a program and use it immediately, youmust check the configuration of the sampler before programming.
The dosing volume setting makes it possible to correctly calculate the level in the bottle
and is a reliable way of preventing the bottles from being overfilled.
Here you can adjust the bottle configuration, the bottle volume and, in the case of thedevice version with vacuum pump, the correct dosing volume:‣ Menu /Setup/General settings/Sampling
You can go to Setup program either via the overview under Select sampling
program or via the path Menu/Setup/Sampling programs
Menu/Setup/Sampling programs
Function

Options

Info

Current program:

Read only

The last sampling program to be created orused is displayed.

StatusRead only

User interface Active:
The sampling program has been started andthe device takes a sample as per the set
parameters.
User interface Inactive:
No sampling program has been started, or aprogram that was running has been paused.
User interface Pause:
Sampling program paused.

Endress+Hauser

87

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Menu/Setup/Sampling programs
Function

Options

Info

Setup programNew

A list of all the programs created isdisplayed. For this reason, it is often helpful
to add a "B" for Basic in the program name.

Program1, which is supplied with the device, is displayed, as is a list of all the programs already created (Basic,
Standard or Advanced programs). You can either create a new program or select an existing one.
If you select an existing program, you can edit, delete, start or duplicate it. Furthermore, you can also see
whether this program is a Basic, Standard or Advanced program. If you are creating a new program, select the
Basic, Standard or Advanced program type.
Basic
Program name

Free text

Use a distinct name for your sampling
program. The program name can be up to 16
characters long.

Bottle configuration

Choice of all possible bottle The ordered bottle configuration is preset or
combinations
the configuration selected in the setup isdisplayed.
Options:• 1 x PE direct distribution• 2 x PE direct distribution• 4 x PE direct distribution• 4 x glass, Schott GLS80
Direct distribution• 12 x PE direct
distribution• 12 x PE/glass distributor
plate• 24 x PE direct
distribution• 24 x PE/glass distributorplate• 6 x + 1 x PE/glass
distributor plate• 6 x + 2 x PE+PE
distributor plate• 6 x + 2 x PE+glass
Distribution plate
12 x + 1 x PE/glass
Distribution plate• 12 x + 2 x PE+PE
distributor plate• 12 x + 2 x PE+glass
Distribution plate• 12 x + 6 x PE direct
distribution• 12 x + 6 x PE/glass
Distribution plate• 1 x PE direct distribution• 12 x PE direct
distribution• 24 x PE direct
distribution

88

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Menu/Setup/Sampling programs
Function
Bottle volume

OptionsInfo

0 to 100000 ml

Set the bottle volume. The preset value
depends on the bottle configuration
configured. The bottle volume is always 30 l
for individual containers. The preset value
depends on the bottle configuration. The
bottle volume is always 20 l for individual
containers.
In the case of asymmetric distribution, e.g.
6 x 3 l + 2 x 13 l or 12 x 1 l + 6 x 2 l, you can
set the bottle volume on the left and right inthe menu items that follow.

Factory setting• 30000 ml• 20000 ml

Sampling mode

Selection• Time paced CTCV
• Flow paced VTCV• Time/flow paced CTVV• External signal

The following functions depend on theoption selected. These versions areillustrated individually in the following
section to provide a clearer understanding of
the options.

Factory setting
Time paced CTCVTime paced CTCV
A constant sampling volume is taken at
steady intervals.
In "Advanced" only:
Time monitoring(min: 00:01:00; max: 99:59:00)
Flow paced VTCVA constant sampling volume is taken atvariable intervals.
Time/flow paced CTVV
A sampling volume adjusted to the flow rateis taken at steady intervals. The sampling
volume is calculated based on the current
flow rate or the average value between two
samples.
External signal
Controlled via binary input.

Endress+Hauser

89

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Settings with a time-paced Basic program
Settings with the Basic program type with 1 bottle
Sampling mode = Time paced CTCV
Menu/Setup/Sampling programs/Setup program/New/Basic
Function

Options

Info

Sampling interval(for version with vacuum pump or
peristaltic pump)(for version with sampling
assembly)

00:01:00 to 99:59:00
HH:MM:SS

Set the sampling interval.

Factory setting
00:10:00 HH:MM:SS
00:10:00 HH:MM:SS
HH:MM:SS
Factory setting
00:10:00 HH:MM:SS

Dosing volume(for version with vacuum pump or
sampling assembly)
Sampling volume(for version with peristaltic pump)
Sampling volume

Factory setting
Vacuum pump:
200 mlPeristaltic pump:
100 mlSampling assembly:
200 ml

Set the dosing volume or the sampling
volume.
Set the sampling volume.
In the version with a vacuum pump or
sampling assembly, the volume is takenfrom the setup and can only be modified
there.
The volume accuracy and the repeatability ofa sampling volume < 20 ml may vary withthe peristaltic pump depending on thespecific application.

Multiplier(for version with vacuum pump or
sampling assembly)

1 to 10You can change the sampling volume using
the multiplier. For example, if the dosing
volume is set to 200 ml, set the multiplier to
2 for a sampling volume of 400 ml. 2
samples are taken in succession whensampling.

Bottle change mode

Selection• Number of samples• Time• External signal

Factory setting
1

The bottle can be changed after a specificnumber of samples, after a time or by an
external signal.

Factory setting
External signal
If you select Bottle change mode Number of samples:
Samples per bottle

1 to 9999
Factory setting
1

Set the number of samples.
If the bottle is full beforehand based on thecalculated level, the system prevents more
samples being added to the bottle. Suchsamples are logged as failed samples in the
program logbook. At the same time, thediagnostics message "Overfill check" (F353)
is also triggered. Set the number of samples.

If you select Bottle change mode Time:Time interval

00-00:02 to 31-00:00
DD-HH:MM
Factory setting
00‐01:00 DD‐HH:MM

90

Set the time (days, hours and minutes) after
which the system should change to the next
bottle.

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Menu/Setup/Sampling programs/Setup program/New/Basic
Function

Options

Info

Bottle synchronization

Selection• None• 1. bottle change time• 1. Time of change +bottle number

None
The sampling and bottle change times are
not synchronized.

Factory settingNone

1. bottle change time
Sampling starts with the first bottle. Set thesynchronization time.
1. Time of change + bottle number
Each bottle is assigned to a specific fill time.
Set the synchronization time and theweekday.

If you select Bottle change mode Bottle change external signal:
External event

Selection• No bottle change input
configured• Binary input Sx

A binary input must be configured for thisfunction. The sampling input can be
configured under "Inputs".

Factory setting
No bottle change input
configured
Multiple bottles

0 to 23
The configuration options
depend on the current
number of bottles

Multiple bottles:"Simultaneous" transfer of two samples toseparate bottles.

Factory setting0Start condition

Selection• Immediate• Date/time

The sampling program can be started either
immediately or at a specific, configurable
time.

Factory setting
Immediate
If you select Start condition Immediate:
Sample at start

Selection
• Yes
• No

Yes
The first sample is taken when the programis started.

Factory setting
Yes

No
The system waits for the interval to elapse
before the first sample is taken.

If you select Start condition Date/time:
Start date

01.01.2000 to 31.12.2099 Set the start date for the sampling program.
The format depends on the option
Factory setting
configured under general settings.
DD.MM.YYYY

Start time

00:00:00 to 23:59:59

Stop condition

Endress+Hauser

Factory setting
HH:MM:SS (24h)

Set the time when the sampling program isstarted. The format depends on the option
configured under general settings.

Selection• Program end• Continuous

Program end
The device stops sampling automaticallyonce it has run through the set program.

Factory setting
Program end

Continuous
The device runs through the set program
continuously in an infinite loop. Do notforget to empty the bottles.

91

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Menu/Setup/Sampling programs/Setup program/New/Basic
Function

Options

Info

Assignment bin. output

Selection• No binary output
configured• Binary output Sx

Assignment of the binary output to theprogram cycle.

Factory setting
No binary output
configured
InputsSettings for the inputs can be made as
described in the "Inputs" section.

Settings with the Basic program type with several bottles
Sampling mode = Time paced CTCV
Menu/Setup/Sampling programs/Setup program/New/Basic
Function

Options

Info

Sampling interval(for version with vacuum pump or
peristaltic pump)(for version with sampling
assembly)

00:01:00 to 99:59:00
HH:MM:SS

Set the sampling interval.

Factory setting
00:10:00 HH:MM:SS
00:10:00 HH:MM:SS
HH:MM:SS
Factory setting
00:10:00 HH:MM:SS

Dosing volume (for version withvacuum pump or sampling
assembly)
Sampling volume (for version withperistaltic pump)
Sampling volume

Factory setting
Vacuum pump:
20 to 350 ml
Peristaltic pump:
10 to 10000 ml
Sampling assembly:
10 to 1000 ml
Factory setting
Vacuum pump:
200 mlPeristaltic pump:
100 mlSampling assembly:
200 mlMultiplier(for version with vacuum pump or
sampling assembly)

1 to 10

Bottle change mode

Selection• Number of samples• Time• External signal

Factory setting
1

Set the dosing volume or the sampling
volume.
Set the sampling volume.
In the version with a vacuum pump or
sampling assembly, the volume is takenfrom the setup and can only be modified
there.
The dosing accuracy and the repeatability ofa sample volume < 20 ml can vary,depending on the specific application.

You can change the sampling volume using
the multiplier. For example, if the dosing
volume is set to 200 ml, set the multiplier to
2 for a sampling volume of 400 ml. 2
samples are taken in succession whensampling.
The bottle can be changed after a specificnumber of samples, after a time or by an
external signal.

Factory setting
External signal
If you select Bottle change mode Number of samples

92

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Menu/Setup/Sampling programs/Setup program/New/Basic
Function

Options

Info

Samples per bottle

1 to 9999

Set the number of samples.
If the bottle is full beforehand based on thecalculated level, the system prevents more
samples being added to the bottle. Suchsamples are logged as failed samples in the
program logbook. At the same time, thediagnostics message "Overfill check" (F353)
is also triggered. Set the number of samples.

Factory setting
1

If you select Bottle change mode Time
External event

Selection• No bottle change input
configured• Binary input Sx

A binary input must be configured for thisfunction. The sampling input can be
configured under "Inputs".

Factory setting
No bottle change input
configured
Time interval

00-00:02 to 31-00:00
DD-HH:MM
Factory setting
00‐01:00 DD‐HH:MM

Multiple bottles

0 to 23
The configuration options
depend on the current
number of bottles

Set the time (days, hours and minutes) after
which the system should change to the next
bottle.

Multiple bottles"Simultaneous" transfer of two samples toseparate bottles.

Factory setting0
Bottle synchronization

Selection• None• 1. bottle change time• 1. Time of change +bottle number
Factory setting
None

None
The sampling and bottle change times are
not synchronized.
1. bottle change time
Sampling starts with the first bottle. Set thesynchronization time.
1. Time of change + bottle number
Each bottle is assigned to a specific fill time.
Set the synchronization time and theweekday.

If you select Bottle change mode External signal
Bottle chg. sig. input

Selection• No bottle change input
configured• Binary input Sx

A binary input must be configured for thisfunction. The sampling input can be
configured under "Inputs".

Factory setting
No bottle change input
configured
Multiple bottles

0 to 23
The configuration options
depend on the current
number of bottles

Multiple bottles"Simultaneous" transfer of two samples toseparate bottles.

Factory setting0Start condition

Selection• Immediate• Date/time

The sampling program can be started either
immediately or at a specific, configurable
time.

Factory setting
Immediate
If you select Start condition Immediate

Endress+Hauser

93

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Menu/Setup/Sampling programs/Setup program/New/Basic
Function

Options

Info

Sample at start

Selection
• Yes
• No

Yes
The first sample is taken when the programis started.

Factory setting
Yes

No
The system waits for the interval to elapse
before the first sample is taken.

Start date

01.01.2000 to 31.12.2099 Set the start date for the sampling program.
The format depends on the option
Factory setting
configured under general settings.
DD.MM.YYYY

Start time

00:00:00 to 23:59:59

Stop condition

Assignment bin. output

Factory setting
HH:MM:SS (24h)

Set the time when the sampling program isstarted. The format depends on the option
configured under general settings.

Selection• Program end• Continuous

Program end
The device stops sampling automaticallyonce it has run through the set program.

Factory setting
Program end

Continuous
The device runs through the set program
continuously in an infinite loop. Do notforget to empty the bottles.

Selection• No binary output
configured• Binary output Sx

Assignment of the binary output to theprogram cycle.

Factory setting
No binary output
configured
InputsSettings for the inputs can be made as
described in the "Inputs" section.

Settings with a flow-paced Basic program
Settings with the Basic program type with 1 bottle
Sampling mode = Flow paced VTCV
Menu/Setup/Sampling programs/Setup program/New/Basic
Function

Options

Info

Flowmeter input

Selection• No flow input
configured• Binary input S:x• Current input S:x

Select the flow input. The binary input or thecurrent input must be configured for thisfunction.
Only the inputs configured as a flow input
are displayed.

Factory setting
No flow input configured
Sampling interval (for version
with vacuum pump or peristaltic
pump)Sampling interval

941000 to 9,999,000 m33
Factory setting
10,000 m33

Set the sampling interval. The unit and thenumber of decimal places are displayed asconfigured under Setup/ Inputs.

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Menu/Setup/Sampling programs/Setup program/New/Basic
Function

Options

Info

Dosing volume (for version withvacuum pump or sampling
assembly)
Sampling volume (for version withperistaltic pump)

Factory setting
Vacuum pump:
20 to 350 ml
Peristaltic pump:
10 to 10000 ml
Sampling assembly:
10 to 1000 ml

Set the dosing volume or the sampling
volume.
In the version with a vacuum pump or
sampling assembly, the volume is takenfrom the setup and can only be modified
there.
The dosing accuracy and the repeatability ofa sample volume < 20 ml can vary,depending on the specific application.

Factory setting• Vacuum pump: 200 ml• Peristaltic pump: 100 ml• Sampling assembly: 200
ml
Multiplier(for version with vacuum pump or
sampling assembly)

1 to 10

Bottle change mode

Selection• Number of samples• Time• External signal

Factory setting
1

You can change the sampling volume using
the multiplier. For example, if the dosing
volume is set to 200 ml, set the multiplier to
2 for a sampling volume of 400 ml. 2
samples are taken in succession whensampling.
The bottle can be changed after a specificnumber of samples, after a time or by an
external signal.

Factory setting
External signal
If is selected: Bottle change mode Number of samples
Samples per bottle

1 ... 9999

Set the number of samples.

Factory setting
1
Having selected Bottle change mode TimeTime interval

00-00:02 ... 31-00:00
DD-HH:MM
Factory setting
00‐01:00 DD‐HH:MM

Bottle synchronization

Selection• None• 1. bottle change time• 1. Time of change +bottle number
Factory setting
None

Start condition

Selection• Immediate• Date/time

Set the time (days, hours and minutes) after
which the system should change to the next
bottle.

None
The sampling and bottle change times are
not synchronized.
1. bottle change time
Sampling starts with the first bottle. Set thesynchronization time.
1. Time of change + bottle number
Each bottle is assigned to a specific fill time.
Set the synchronization time and theweekday.
The sampling program can be started either
immediately or at a specific, configurable
time.

Factory setting
Immediate
Having selected Start condition Immediate
Sample at start

Selection
• Yes
• No

Yes
The first sample is taken when the programis started.

Factory setting
Yes

No
The system waits for the interval to elapse
before the first sample is taken.

Having selected Start condition Date/time

Endress+Hauser

95

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Menu/Setup/Sampling programs/Setup program/New/Basic
Function

Options

Start date

01.01.2000 ... 31.12.2099 Set the start date for the sampling program.
The format depends on the option
Factory setting
configured under general settings.
DD.MM.YYYY

Start time

00:00:00 ... 23:59:59

Stop condition

Assignment bin. output

Info

Factory setting
HH:MM:SS (24h)

Set the time when the sampling program isstarted. The format depends on the option
configured under general settings.

Selection• Program end• Continuous

Program end
The device stops sampling automaticallyonce it has run through the set program.

Factory setting
Program end

Continuous
The device runs through the set program
continuously in an infinite loop. Do notforget to empty the bottles.

Selection• No binary output
configured• Binary output Sx

Assignment of the binary output to theprogram cycle.

Factory setting
No binary output
configured
InputsSettings for the inputs can be made as
described in the "Inputs" section.

Settings with the Basic program type with several bottles
Sampling mode = Flow paced VTCV
Menu/Setup/Sampling programs/Setup program/New/Basic
Function

Options

Info

Flowmeter input

Selection• No flow input
configured• Binary input S:x• Current input S:x

Select the flow input. The binary input or thecurrent input must be configured for thisfunction. Only the inputs configured as aflow input are displayed.

Factory setting
No flow input configured
Sampling interval (for version
with vacuum pump or peristaltic
pump)Sampling interval

1000 to 9,999,000 m33

Dosing volume (for version withvacuum pump or sampling
assembly)
Sampling volume (for version withperistaltic pump)
Sampling volume

Factory setting
Vacuum pump:
20 to 350 ml
Peristaltic pump:
10 to 10000 ml
Sampling assembly:
10 to 1000 ml

Factory setting
10,000 m33

Factory setting
Vacuum pump:
200 mlPeristaltic pump:
100 mlSampling assembly:
200 ml96

Set the sampling interval. The unit and thenumber of decimal places are displayed asconfigured under Setup/ Inputs.
Set the dosing volume or the sampling
volume.
Set the sampling volume.
In the version with a vacuum pump or
sampling assembly, the volume is takenfrom the setup and can only be modified
there.
The dosing accuracy and the repeatability ofa sample volume < 20 ml can vary,depending on the specific application.

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Menu/Setup/Sampling programs/Setup program/New/Basic
Function

Options

Info

Multiplier(for version with vacuum pump or
sampling assembly)

1 to 10You can change the sampling volume using
the multiplier. For example, if the dosing
volume is set to 200 ml, set the multiplier to
2 for a sampling volume of 400 ml. 2
samples are taken in succession whensampling.

Bottle change mode

Selection• Number of samples• Time• External signal

Factory setting
1

The bottle can be changed after a specificnumber of samples, after a time or by an
external signal.

Factory setting
External signal
If is selected: Bottle change mode Number of samples
Samples per bottle

1 ... 9999

Set the number of samples.

Factory setting
1
Having selected Bottle change mode TimeTime interval

00-00:02 ... 31-00:00
DD-HH:MM
Factory setting
00‐01:00 DD‐HH:MM

Multiple bottles

0 ... 23
The configuration options
depend on the current
number of bottles

Set the time (days, hours and minutes) after
which the system should change to the next
bottle.

Multiple bottles"Simultaneous" transfer of two samples toseparate bottles.

Factory setting0
Bottle synchronization

Selection• None• 1. bottle change time• 1. Time of change +bottle number
Factory setting
None

None
The sampling and bottle change times are
not synchronized.
1. bottle change time
Sampling starts with the first bottle. Set thesynchronization time.
1. Time of change + bottle number
Each bottle is assigned to a specific fill time.
Set the synchronization time and theweekday.

Having selected Bottle change mode External signal
Bottle chg. sig. input

Selection• No bottle change input
configured• Binary input Sx
Factory setting
No bottle change input
configured

Multiple bottles

0 ... 23
The configuration options
depend on the current
number of bottles

The bottle change input can be configured
under Inputs .
A binary input must be configured for thisfunction. The sampling input can be
configured under "Inputs".

Multiple bottles"Simultaneous" transfer of two samples toseparate bottles.

Factory setting0Start condition

Selection• Immediate• Date/time

The sampling program can be started either
immediately or at a specific, configurable
time.

Factory setting
Immediate

Endress+Hauser

97

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Menu/Setup/Sampling programs/Setup program/New/Basic
Function

Options

Info

Having selected Start condition Immediate
Sample at start

Selection
• Yes
• No

Yes
The first sample is taken when the programis started.

Factory setting
Yes

No
The system waits for the interval to elapse
before the first sample is taken.

Having selected Start condition Date/time
Start date

01.01.2000 ... 31.12.2099 Set the start date for the sampling program.
The format depends on the option
Factory setting
configured under general settings.
DD.MM.YYYY

Start time

00:00:00 ... 23:59:59

Stop condition

Assignment bin. output

Factory setting
HH:MM:SS (24h)

Set the time when the sampling program isstarted. The format depends on the option
configured under general settings.

Selection• Program end• Continuous

Program end
The device stops sampling automaticallyonce it has run through the set program.

Factory setting
Program end

Continuous
The device runs through the set program
continuously in an infinite loop. Do notforget to empty the bottles.

Selection• No binary output
configured• Binary output Sx

Assignment of the binary output to theprogram cycle.

Factory setting
No binary output
configured
InputsSettings for the inputs can be made as
described in the "Inputs" section.

Settings for the time/flow-paced Basic program (only for version with peristaltic
pump)
Settings with the Basic program type with 1 bottle
Sampling mode = Time/flow paced CTVV
Menu/Setup/Sampling programs/Setup program/New/Basic
Function

Options

Info

Sampling volume input

Selection• No flow input
configured• Binary input S:x• Current input S:x

Select the sampling volume input. The
binary input or the current input must be
configured for this function. Only the inputs
configured as a sampling volume input are
displayed.

Factory setting
No flow input configured
Sampling interval

00:01:00 ... 99:59:00
HH:MM:SS

Set the sampling interval.

Factory setting
00:10:00 HH:MM:SS
00:10:00 HH:MM:SS
HH:MM:SS
Factory setting
00:10:00 HH:MM:SS

98

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Menu/Setup/Sampling programs/Setup program/New/Basic
Function

Options

Info

If is selected: Sampling volume input Binary input
Sampling volume

10 to 10000 ml
Factory setting
20 ml

Set the sampling volume.
The dosing accuracy and the repeatability ofa sample volume < 20 ml can vary,depending on the specific application.

If is selected: Sampling volume input Current input
Sampling volume 20mA

Flow calculation

Bottle change mode

10 to 10000 ml
Factory setting
100 mlSet what sampling volume should be
grabbed at 20 mA.
The dosing accuracy and the repeatability ofa sample volume < 20 ml can vary,depending on the specific application.

Selection• Current• Average flow

Current:
The current flow is converted to thesampling volume at the time of sampling.

Factory setting
Current

Average flow:
The system calculates the mean between thelast and the current sample and sets the
sampling volume accordingly.

Selection• Number of samples• Time• External signal

The bottle can be changed after a specificnumber of samples, after a time or by an
external signal.

Factory setting
External signal
Having selected Bottle change mode Number of samples
Samples per bottle

1 ... 9999

Set the number of samples.

Factory setting
1
Having selected Bottle change mode TimeTime interval

00-00:02 ... 31-00:00
DD-HH:MM
Factory setting
00‐01:00 DD‐HH:MM

Bottle synchronization

Selection• None• 1. bottle change time• 1. Time of change +bottle number
Factory setting
None

Start condition

Selection• Immediate• Date/time

Set the time (days, hours and minutes) after
which the system should change to the next
bottle.

None
The sampling and bottle change times are
not synchronized.
1. bottle change time
Sampling starts with the first bottle. Set thesynchronization time.
1. Time of change + bottle number
Each bottle is assigned to a specific fill time.
Set the synchronization time and theweekday.
The sampling program can be started either
immediately or at a specific, configurable
time.

Factory setting
Immediate
Having selected Start condition Date/time
Start date

01.01.2000 ... 31.12.2099 Set the start date for the sampling program.
The format depends on the option
Factory setting
configured under general settings.
DD.MM.YYYY

Start time

00:00:00 ... 23:59:59
Factory setting
HH:MM:SS (24h)Endress+Hauser

Set the time when the sampling program isstarted. The format depends on the option
configured under general settings.

99

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Menu/Setup/Sampling programs/Setup program/New/Basic
Function

Options

Info

Stop condition

Selection• Program end• Continuous

Program end
The device stops sampling automaticallyonce it has run through the set program.

Factory setting
Program end

Continuous
The device runs through the set program
continuously in an infinite loop. Do notforget to empty the bottles.

Selection• No binary output
configured• Binary output Sx

Assignment of the binary output to theprogram cycle.

Assignment bin. output

Factory setting
No binary output
configured
InputsSettings for the inputs can be made as
described in the "Inputs" section.

Settings with the Basic program type with several bottles
Sampling mode = Time/flow paced CTVV
Menu/Setup/Sampling programs/Setup program/New/Basic
Function

Options

Info

Sampling volume input

Selection• No flow input
configured• Binary input S:x• Current input S:x

Select the sampling volume input. The
binary input or the current input must be
configured for this function. Only the inputs
configured as a sampling volume input are
displayed.

Factory setting
No flow input configured
Sampling interval

00:01:00 ... 99:59:00
HH:MM:SS

Set the sampling interval.

Factory setting
00:10:00 HH:MM:SS
00:10:00 HH:MM:SS
HH:MM:SS
Factory setting
00:10:00 HH:MM:SS
If is selected: Sampling volume input Binary input
Sampling volume

10 to 10000 ml
Factory setting
20 ml

Set the sampling volume.
The dosing accuracy and the repeatability ofa sample volume < 20 ml can vary,depending on the specific application.

If is selected: Sampling volume input Current input
Sampling volume 20mA

Flow calculation

100

10 to 10000 ml
Factory setting
100 mlSet what sampling volume should be
grabbed at 20 mA.
The dosing accuracy and the repeatability ofa sample volume < 20 ml can vary,depending on the specific application.

Selection• Current• Average flow

Current:
The current flow is converted to thesampling volume at the time of sampling.

Factory setting
Current

Average flow:
The system calculates the mean between thelast and the current sample and sets the
sampling volume accordingly.

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Menu/Setup/Sampling programs/Setup program/New/Basic
Function

Options

Info

Bottle change mode

Selection• Number of samples• Time• External signal

The bottle can be changed after a specificnumber of samples, after a time or by an
external signal.

Factory setting
External signal
Having selected Bottle change mode Number of samples
Samples per bottle

1 ... 9999

Set the number of samples.

Factory setting
1
Having selected Bottle change mode TimeTime interval

00-00:02 ... 31-00:00
DD-HH:MM
Factory setting
00‐01:00 DD‐HH:MM

Multiple bottles

0 ... 23
The configuration options
depend on the current
number of bottles

Set the time (days, hours and minutes) after
which the system should change to the next
bottle.

Multiple bottles:"Simultaneous" transfer of two samples toseparate bottles.

Factory setting0
Having selected Bottle change mode External signal
Bottle chg. sig. input

Selection• No bottle change input
configured• Binary input Sx
Factory setting
No bottle change input
configured

Multiple bottles

0 ... 23
The configuration options
depend on the current
number of bottles

The bottle change input can be configured
under Inputs .
A binary input must be configured for thisfunction. The sampling input can be
configured under "Inputs".

Multiple bottles:"Simultaneous" transfer of two samples toseparate bottles.

Factory setting0Start condition

Selection• Immediate• Date/time

The sampling program can be started either
immediately or at a specific, configurable
time.

Factory setting
Immediate
Having selected Start condition Date/time
Start date

01.01.2000 ... 31.12.2099 Set the start date for the sampling program.
The format depends on the option
Factory setting
configured under general settings.
DD.MM.YYYY

Start time

00:00:00 ... 23:59:59

Stop condition

Endress+Hauser

Factory setting
HH:MM:SS (24h)

Set the time when the sampling program isstarted. The format depends on the option
configured under general settings.

Selection• Program end• Continuous

Program end
The device stops sampling automaticallyonce it has run through the set program.

Factory setting
Program end

Continuous
The device runs through the set program
continuously in an infinite loop. Do notforget to empty the bottles.

101

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Menu/Setup/Sampling programs/Setup program/New/Basic
Function

Options

Info

Assignment bin. output

Selection• No binary output
configured• Binary output Sx

Assignment of the binary output to theprogram cycle.

Factory setting
No binary output
configured
InputsSettings for the inputs can be made as
described in the "Inputs" section.

Settings with a Basic program and external signal
Settings with the Basic program type via an external signal with 1 bottle
Sampling mode = External signal
Menu/Setup/Sampling programs/Setup program/New/Basic
Function

Options

Info

Sampling volume input

10 to 1000 ml

Enter the sample volume.

Factory setting
100 mlSampling signal input

Selection
No sampling input
configured
Factory setting
No sampling input
configured

Bottle change mode

Selection• Number of samples• Time• Number of samples

Select the input for the sampling signal. The
fieldbus must be configured for thisfunction.
The sampling input can be configured under
Inputs .

The bottle can be changed after a specificnumber of samples, after a time or by an
external signal.

Factory setting
Number of samples
Having selected Bottle change mode Number of samples
Samples per bottle

1 ... 9999

Set the number of samples.

Factory setting
1
Having selected Bottle change mode TimeTime interval

00-00:02 ... 31-00:00
DD-HH:MM
Factory setting
00‐01:00 DD‐HH:MM

Bottle synchronization

Selection• None• 1. bottle change time• 1. Time of change +bottle number
Factory setting
None

102

Set the time (days, hours and minutes) after
which the system should change to the next
bottle.

None
The sampling and bottle change times are
not synchronized.
1. bottle change time
Sampling starts with the first bottle. Set thesynchronization time.
1. Time of change + bottle number
Each bottle is assigned to a specific fill time.
Set the synchronization time and theweekday.

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Menu/Setup/Sampling programs/Setup program/New/Basic
Function

Options

Info

Start condition

Selection• Immediate• Date/time

The sampling program can be started either
immediately or at a specific, configurable
time.

Factory setting
Immediate
Having selected Start condition Immediate
Sample at start

Selection
• Yes
• No

Yes
The first sample is taken when the programis started.

Factory setting
Yes

No
The system waits for the interval to elapse
before the first sample is taken.

Having selected Start condition Date/time
Start date

01.01.2000 ... 31.12.2099 Set the start date for the sampling program.
The format depends on the option
Factory setting
configured under general settings.
DD.MM.YYYY

Start time

00:00:00 ... 23:59:59

Stop condition

Assignment bin. output

Factory setting
HH:MM:SS (24h)

Set the time when the sampling program isstarted. The format depends on the option
configured under general settings.

Selection• Program end• Continuous

Program end
The device stops sampling automaticallyonce it has run through the set program.

Factory setting
Program end

Continuous
The device runs through the set program
continuously in an infinite loop. Do notforget to empty the bottles.

Selection• No binary output
configured• Binary output Sx

Assignment of the binary output to theprogram cycle.

Factory setting
No binary output
configured
InputsSettings for the inputs can be made as
described in the "Inputs" section.

Settings with the Basic program type via an external signal with several bottles
Sampling mode = External signal
Menu/Setup/Sampling programs/Setup program/New/Basic
Function

Options

Info

Sampling volume input

10 to 1000 ml

Enter the sample volume.

Factory setting
100 mlSampling signal input

Selection
No sampling input
configured
Factory setting
No sampling input
configured

Endress+Hauser

Select the input for the sampling signal. The
fieldbus must be configured for thisfunction.
The sampling input can be configured under
Inputs .

103

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Menu/Setup/Sampling programs/Setup program/New/Basic
Function

Options

Info

Bottle change mode

Selection• Number of samples• Time• Number of samples

The bottle can be changed after a specificnumber of samples, after a time or by an
external signal.

Factory setting
Number of samples
Having selected Bottle change mode Number of samples
Samples per bottle

1 ... 9999

Set the number of samples.

Factory setting
1
Having selected Bottle change mode TimeTime interval

00-00:02 ... 31-00:00
DD-HH:MM
Factory setting
00‐01:00 DD‐HH:MM

Set the time (days, hours and minutes) after
which the system should change to the next
bottle.

Having selected Bottle change mode External signal
Bottle chg. sig. input

Selection• No bottle change input
configured• Binary input Sx
Factory setting
No bottle change input
configured

Multiple bottles

0 ... 23
The configuration options
depend on the current
number of bottles

The bottle change input can be configured
under Inputs .
A binary input must be configured for thisfunction. The sampling input can be
configured under "Inputs".

Multiple bottles:"Simultaneous" transfer of two samples toseparate bottles.

Factory setting0Start condition

Selection• Immediate• Date/time

The sampling program can be started either
immediately or at a specific, configurable
time.

Factory setting
Immediate
Having selected Start condition Immediate
Sample at start

Selection
• Yes
• No

Yes
The first sample is taken when the programis started.

Factory setting
Yes

No
The system waits for the interval to elapse
before the first sample is taken.

Having selected Start condition Date/time
Start date

01.01.2000 ... 31.12.2099 Set the start date for the sampling program.
The format depends on the option
Factory setting
configured under general settings.
DD.MM.YYYY

Start time

00:00:00 ... 23:59:59
Factory setting
HH:MM:SS (24h)104

Set the time when the sampling program isstarted. The format depends on the option
configured under general settings.

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Menu/Setup/Sampling programs/Setup program/New/Basic
Function

Options

Info

Stop condition

Selection• Program end• Continuous

Program end
The device stops sampling automaticallyonce it has run through the set program.

Factory setting
Program end

Continuous
The device runs through the set program
continuously in an infinite loop. Do notforget to empty the bottles.

Selection• No binary output
configured• Binary output Sx

Assignment of the binary output to theprogram cycle.

Assignment bin. output

Factory setting
No binary output
configured
Inputs

10.3.3

Settings for the inputs can be made as
described in the "Inputs" section.

Program types: Standard and Advanced

Standard program:Comprises a maximum of five subprograms
Advanced program:• Comprises a maximum of 24 subprograms.
• These subprograms can be run simultaneously or consecutively.
• Each event subprogram can consist of up to 3 conditions.
• As the device contains dual bottle trays, you can assign a program easily, and easily
detect a change in the program.
Settings for the Standard program
Menu/Setup/Sampling programs
Function

Options

Info

Setup programNew

A list of all the programs created isdisplayed. For this reason, it is often helpful
to add an "S" for Standard in the program
name.

Standard
Program name

Free text

Use a distinct name for your sampling
program. The program name can be up to 16
characters long.

Bottle volume

0 to 100000 ml
0 to 20000 ml

Set the bottle volume. The preset value
depends on the bottle configuration
configured. The bottle volume is always 30 l
for individual containers. The preset value
depends on the bottle configuration. The
bottle volume is always 20 l for individual
containers.
In the case of asymmetric distribution, e.g. 6
x 3 l + 2 x 13 l, you can set the bottle volume
on the left and right in the menu items that
follow.

Factory setting• 30000 ml• 20000 ml

Bottle configuration

Endress+Hauser

Choice of all possible bottle The ordered bottle configuration is preset or
combinations
the configuration selected in the setup isdisplayed.

105

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Menu/Setup/Sampling programs
FunctionStart condition

Options

Info

Selection• Immediate• Date/time• Volume

The sampling program can be started either
immediately, at a specific, configurable time,or when a certain totalized flow is reached.

Factory setting
Immediate
Having selected Start condition Date/time
Start time

00:00:00 ... 23:59:59
Factory setting
HH:MM:SS (24h)Start date

Set the time when the sampling program isstarted. The format depends on the option
configured under general settings.

01.01.2000 ... 31.12.2099 Set the start date for the sampling program.
The format depends on the option
Factory setting
configured under general settings.
DD.MM.YYYY

Having selected Start condition Volume
Start volume input

Selection• No flow input
configured• Binary input S:x• Current input S:x

Select the start volume input. The binary
input or the current input must be
configured for this function. Only the inputs
configured for flow measurement are
displayed.

Factory setting
No flow input configured
Start flow sum

1000 to 9,999,000 m3

Set the start volume.

Factory setting
10,000 m3
Stop condition

Selection• Program end• Continuous• Date/time
Factory setting
Program end

Program end
The device stops sampling automaticallyonce it has run through the set program.
Continuous
The device runs through the set program
continuously in an infinite loop. Do notforget to empty the bottles.
Date/time
The device stops the set program at a
specific time.

Having selected Start condition Date/time
Stop date

01.01.2000 ... 31.12.2099 Set the stop date for the sampling program.
The format depends on the option
Factory setting
configured under general settings.
DD.MM.YYYY

Stop time

00:00:00 ... 23:59:59
Factory setting
HH:MM:SS (24h)

Set the time when the sampling program is
stopped. The format depends on the option
configured under general settings.

Setup subprogram
New
Programpart106

Use a distinct name for your subprogram.
The program name can be up to 16
characters long.

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Menu/Setup/Sampling programs
Function
Sampling mode

Options

Info

Selection• Time paced CTCV
• Flow paced VTCV• Time/flow paced CTVV• External signal

Time paced CTCV
A constant sampling volume is taken at
steady intervals.

Factory setting

Flow paced VTCVA constant sampling volume is taken atvariable intervals. Time override can be
enabled in an advanced program. With time
monitoring, it is possible to interrupt long,flow-controlled sampling intervals caused bya low flow rate. A sample which is also timecontrolled is taken.
Time/flow paced CTVV• (only for version with peristaltic pump)• A variable sampling volume is taken at
steady intervals.
External signal
A pulse at the binary input starts a sampling
cycle.

The settings that depend on the sampling mode are listed in the "Program type: Basic" section.
Enable subprogram

Selection• Immediate• Individual dates• Repeating date
• Interval• Deactivation
Factory setting
Immediate

Immediate
The subprogram is enabled immediately.
Individual dates
Set the start and stop dates for enabling thesubprogram.
Repeating date
Set the start condition, activity time andrepetition interval for the subprogram.
Interval
Set the start condition, activity time andinactivity time for the subprogram.
Deactivation
Subprogram 2 or 2+n is started as soon as
subprogram 1 is disabled. Only possible withmultiple subprograms.

Having selected Enable subprogram Individual dates
Individual dates
Set the start and stop times for the subprogram. Enter a new date via "INSERT". Delete a date via"DELETE". You can assign a maximum of 25 start and stop dates.
Having selected Enable subprogram Repeating date
Start condition

Selection• No delay• Date/Time• Time• No delay (sync)
Factory setting
No delay (sync)

No delay
The subprogram is started when the
program is enabled.
Date/Time
Set the start date and start time for enabling
the subprogram.
Time
Set the start time for enabling thesubprogram.
No delay (sync)
Only possible on program start Immediate
and with bottle assignment "Dynamic or
Static".

Activity time

00:01 to 99:59 HH:MM
Factory setting
00:01 HH:MM

Specify how long the subprogram should be
active in hours and minutes. The time to be
selected depends on the setting for therepetition mode.

Multiple dateEndress+Hauser

107

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Menu/Setup/Sampling programs
Function
Repetition mode

Options

Info

Selection• Daily interval• Weekly interval• Days of week

Daily intervalSpecify whether the subprogram should be
repeated every day.

Factory setting
Daily interval

Weekly intervalSpecify whether the subprogram should be
repeated every week.
Days of week
Specify whether the subprogram should be
repeated on certain days of the week. -->Select the days of the week in thesubsequent menu item.

Repetition interval(only with Daily intervaland Weekly interval)

1 ... 999
Factory setting
1

Specify for how many days or weeks the
subprogram should be active.
Example: Repetition mode = daily interval
Repetition interval = 2
The subprogram is enabled every second dayfrom the start condition.

Having selected Enable subprogram Interval
Ensure activation

Selection• No• Daily• Weekly

Ensures that the subprogram is activated at
the specified intervals. If necessary, theinactivity time is shortened by one day or
one week.

Factory setting
No
Start condition

Selection• No delay• Date/Time• Time• No delay (sync)

The subprogram is started when the
program is enabled.

Factory setting
No delay (sync)

Time
Set the start time for enabling thesubprogram.

Date/Time
Set the start date and start time for enabling
the subprogram.

No delay (sync)
Only possible on program start Immediate
and with bottle assignment "Dynamic or
Static".
Start date

01.01.2000 ... 31.12.2099 Set the start date for the 1st interval. The
format depends on the option configured
Factory setting
under general settings.
DD.MM.YYYY

Start time

00:00:00 ... 23:59:59
Factory setting
00‐00:01 DD‐HH:MM

Activity time

Inactivity time

00-00:01 ... 31-00:00
DD-HH:MM

Set the time for the 1st interval. The format
depends on the option configured undergeneral settings.

Factory setting
00‐00:01 DD‐HH:MM

Specify how long the subprogram should be
active in days, hours and minutes. The
subprogram always begins with anactivation.

00-00:01 ... 31-00:00
DD-HH:MM

Specify how long the subprogram should beinactive in days, hours and minutes.

Factory setting
00‐00:01 DD‐HH:MM
Sample at enable

Selection
• Yes
• No
Factory setting
Yes

108

Specify whether the first sample should betaken directly when the subprogram isenabled. For example, with intervals, asample is taken at the start of every
activation interval.

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Menu/Setup/Sampling programs
Function
Sample at disable

Options

Info

Selection
• Yes
• No

Specify whether a sample should be taken
when the subprogram is disabled. For
example, with intervals, a sample is taken at
the end of every activation interval.

Factory settingNo
New bottle at disable

Selection
• Yes
• No
Factory setting
Yes

Bottle synchronization

Selection• None• 1. bottle change time• 1. Time of change +bottle number• External BC sync input
Factory setting
None

Specific bottles can be assigned specificfilling times with the bottle synchronization
function. For example, bottle 1 is to be filledfrom midnight to 2 a.m., bottle 2 from 2
a.m. to 4 a.m. etc..
None
The sampling and bottle change times are
not synchronized.
1. bottle change time
Sampling starts with the first bottle. Thechange to the next bottle is synchronized.
1. Time of change + bottle number
Each bottle is allocated a specific filling time.
External BC sync input
The system changes to the next bottle whenan external signal is received. The externalsignal first has to be configured via thebinary input. The binary input can then be
selected as the source.

Assignment bin. output

Selection• No binary output
configured• Binary output S:xAssignment of the binary output to theprogram cycle.

Factory setting
No binary output
configured
Use "SAVE" to save the subprogram setup. Then press "ESC" to return to the main program. A prompt to save theprogram appears if you have not yet saved the subprogram. You can avoid saving the program by pressing "ESC".
InputsBottle assignment(only possible
with multiple bottles)
This menu item appears whenmore than one bottle is available,
regardless of the number ofsubprograms.

Settings for the inputs can be made as
described in the "Inputs" section.
Selection• No bottle assignment• Dynamic bottle
assignment• Statical bottle
assignment

No bottle assignment:
Each subprogram fills the same bottle until
the bottle is full. All the subprograms thenchange to the next bottle. Only visible if
there is more than one subprogram.

Dynamic bottle assignment:
Factory setting
When the subprogram changes, the system
Dynamic bottle assignment switches to the next empty bottle
Statical bottle assignment:
A table can be used to assign a subprogram
to each bottle

Via the "Bottle change" menu item, the bottle change can be configured after a certain time or number ofsamples if bottle distribution with more than one bottle has been selected and either dynamic or static bottle
assignment has been selected.
Having selected Bottle assignmentStatical bottle assignment:
Bottle assignment table
Select a bottle and assign it a subprogram.

Endress+Hauser

109

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Programming example: Program switchover
The following example explains how to program a program change in the Standard
program.
Flow-paced sampling• Daily average sample• From Monday to Friday
Time-paced sampling• In a composite container• On Saturday and Sunday
Menu/Setup/Sampling programs/Setup program/New
Function

Entry for sample program

Standard
Program name

TDVT 6+20

Bottle configuration

6x + 1x

Bottle volume left

3000 ml

Bottle volume right20000 mlStart condition

Date/time

Start date

DD.MM.YYYY e.g. 03.06.2010

Start date

HH:MM:SS e.g. 12:00:00

Stop condition

Continuous

Setup subprogram
Programpart

MO ‐ FR"SAVE" ‐ saves the "MO ‐ FR" subprogram
Setup subprogram
Programpart

SAT ‐ SUN"SAVE" ‐ saves the "SAT ‐ SUN" subprogram"ESC" ‐ the main program is displayed
Bottle assignment

Statical bottle assignment

Programpart: MO ‐ FR
Edit
Sampling mode

Flow paced VTCV

Flow measurement

Current input S:1

Sampling interval

1000 m3

Sampling volume

80 ml

Bottle change mode

Time

Time interval

04:00

Multiple bottles

0

Enable subprogram

Multiple date

Start condition

No delay

Activity time

24:00

Repeating date

110

Repetition modeDays of week

MondayYes

Tuesday

Yes

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Menu/Setup/Sampling programs/Setup program/New
Function

Entry for sample program
WednesdayYes

ThursdayYes

FridayYes

SaturdayNo

SundayNo

Sample at enable

Yes

Sample at disable

No"SAVE" ‐ saves the "MO ‐ FR" subprogram"ESC" ‐ "ESC"
Setup subprogram: SAT ‐ SUN
Edit
Sampling mode

Time paced CTCV

Sampling interval

15 minSampling volume

100 mlBottle change mode

Time

Time interval

48:00

Multiple bottles

0

Enable subprogram

Multiple date

Start condition

No delay

Activity time

24:00

Repeating date
Repetition modeDays of week

MondayNo

TuesdayNo

WednesdayNo

ThursdayNo

FridayNo

Saturday

Yes

SundayYes

Sample at enable

Yes

Sample at disable

No"SAVE" ‐ saves the "SAT ‐ SUN" subprogram"ESC" ‐ "ESC"
Bottle assignment table
Bottle 1

MO ‐ FR

Bottle 6
Bottle 7

SAT ‐ SUN

InputsPress the "SAVE" soft key to save the program.

 In the overview, you can start the program created under "Select sampling program".

Endress+Hauser

111

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Settings for the Advanced program
Menu/Setup/Sampling programs
Function

Options

Info

Setup programNew

A list of all the programs created isdisplayed. For this reason, it is often helpful
to add an "S" for Standard in the program
name.

Advanced
Program name

Free text

Use a distinct name for your sampling
program. The program name can be up to 16
characters long.

Bottle configuration

Choice of all possible bottle
combinations

The ordered bottle configuration is preset or
the configuration selected in the setup isdisplayed.

Bottle volume

0 to 100000 ml

Set the bottle volume. The preset value
depends on the bottle configuration
configured. The bottle volume is always 30 l
for individual containers. The preset value
depends on the bottle configuration. The
bottle volume is always 20 l for individual
containers.
In the case of asymmetric distribution, e.g. 6
x 3 l + 2 x 13 l, you can set the bottle volume
on the left and right in the menu items that
follow.

Factory setting• 30000 ml• 20000 ml

Start condition

Selection• Immediate• Date/time• Volume• External start• External duration• Fieldbus(optional)
Factory setting
Immediate

Immediate
The sampling program is started
immediately.
Date/time
The sampling program is started at a specifictime that can be configured.
VolumeThe sampling program is started when acertain totalized flow is reached.
External start
The sampling program is started by a pulse
at the configured binary input.
External duration
The sampling program is active as long as
the configured input has the corresponding
level
Fieldbus (optional)
The sampling program is started by a signal
from the control system.

Having selected Start condition Date/time
Start date

01.01.2000 ... 31.12.2099
Factory setting
DD.MM.YYYY

Start time

00:00:00 ... 23:59:59
Factory setting
HH:MM:SS (24h)

Set the start date for the sampling program.
The format depends on the option
configured under general settings.
Set the time when the sampling program isstarted. The format depends on the option
configured under general settings.

Having selected Start condition Volume

112

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Menu/Setup/Sampling programs
FunctionStart volume input

Options

Info

Selection• No flow input configured• Binary input S:x• Current input S:x

Select the start volume input. The binary
input or the current input must be
configured for this function. Only the inputs
configured for flow measurement are
displayed.

Factory setting
No flow input configured
Start flow sum

1000 to 9,999,000 m3

Set the start volume.

Factory setting
10,000 m3
Having selected Start condition External start
Start signal input

Selection• No program start input
configured• Binary input S:x•

Select the program start input. The binary
input must be configured for this function.
Only the inputs configured as a program
start input are displayed.

Factory setting
No program start input
configured
Having selected Start condition External duration
Start signal input

Selection• No program start input
configured• Binary input S:x•

Select the program duration input. The
binary input must be configured for thisfunction. Only the inputs configured as aprogram start input are displayed.

Factory setting
No program start input
configured
Having selected Start condition PROFIBUS DPor Modbus
Start signal input

Selection• None• %0V DO 01• %0V DO 02• %0V DO 03• %0V DO 04• %0V DO 05• %0V DO 06• %0V DO 07• %0V DO 08

Select the program start input.

Factory setting
None
Stop condition(not for external start)

Selection• Program end• Continuous• Date/time• External duration• Fieldbus(optional)
Factory setting
Program end

Program end
The device stops sampling automaticallyonce it has run through the set program.
Continuous
The device runs through the set program
continuously in an infinite loop. Do notforget to empty the bottles.
External duration
The device stops the set program if a pulse issent to a binary input configured accordingly.
Fieldbus (optional)
The sampling program is stopped by a signal
from the control system.

Having selected Stop condition Date/time
Stop date

01.01.2000 ... 31.12.2099
Factory setting
DD.MM.YYYY

Endress+Hauser

Set the stop date for the sampling program.
The format depends on the option
configured under general settings.

113

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Menu/Setup/Sampling programs
Function
Stop time

OptionsInfo

00:00:00 ... 23:59:59

Set the time when the sampling program is
stopped. The format depends on the option
configured under general settings.

Factory setting
HH:MM:SS (24h)Having selected Stop condition External signal
Stop signal input

Selection• No program start input
configured• Binary input S:x•

Select the program stop input. The binary
input must be configured for this function.
Only the inputs configured as a program stop
input are displayed.

Factory setting
No program start input
configured
Having selected Stop conditionPROFIBUS DPor Modbus
Stop signal input

Selection• None• %0V DO 01• %0V DO 02• %0V DO 03• %0V DO 04• %0V DO 05• %0V DO 06• %0V DO 07• %0V DO 08

Select the program stop input.

Factory setting
None
Setup subprogram
New
Programpart

Sampling mode

Use a distinct name for your subprogram.
The program name can be up to 16
characters long.
Selection• Time paced CTCV
• Flow paced VTCV• Time/flow paced CTVV
• Single sample• Sampling table• External signal•• Fieldbus
Factory setting
Flow paced VTCVTime paced CTCV
A constant sampling volume is taken at
steady intervals.
Flow paced VTCVA constant sampling volume is taken atvariable intervals.
Time/flow paced CTVV• (only for version with peristaltic pump)• A variable sampling volume is taken at
steady intervals.
Single sample
The device takes a single sample with a
specific volume.
Sampling table
The time and the sampling volume isassigned to a certain bottle in the samplingtable.
External signal
A sample is taken when an external signal isreceived.
Fieldbus
The sampling cycle is triggered via thecontrol system.

The settings that depend on the sampling mode (time-paced, flow-paced and time/flow-paced sampling) arelisted in the "Program type: Basic" section.
Having selected Sampling modeSingle sample

114

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Menu/Setup/Sampling programs
Function

Options

Info

Dosing volume(for version with vacuum
pump or sampling
assembly)
Sampling volume(for version withperistaltic pump)

Vacuum pump: 20 to 350 ml
Peristaltic pump: 10 to 10000ml
Sampling assembly: 10 to1000 ml

Depending on the version, set the dosing
volume or the sampling volume
The volume is taken from the setup in theversion with a vacuum pump or sampling
assembly.
The dosing accuracy and the repeatability ofa sample volume < 20 ml may varydepending on the specific application

Sampling volume

10 to 10000 ml

Factory setting
Vacuum pump: 200 ml
Peristaltic pump: 100 ml
Sampling assembly: 200 ml

Factory setting
100 ml

Set the sampling volume.
The dosing accuracy and the repeatability ofa sample volume < 20 ml may varydepending on the specific application

Having selected Sampling mode Sampling table
Sampling table
Assign the time and sampling volume to a certain bottle. Add a new entry via "INSERT". Delete an entry
via "DELETE". You can make a maximum of 24 entries.
Example:• Bottle 1• Bottle 2

Example:• Delta (=waiting time):
01:00:00• Delta (=waiting time):
00:10:00• Volume: 100 ml• Volume: 100 ml

1st sampling one hour after program start: 100 ml in bottle 1
2nd sampling 10 minutes later: 100 ml in bottle 2
The sampling table indicates: After the defined "Delta time" (column 2) the volume of column 3 will be
dosed into the bottle of column 1.
Having selected Sampling mode External signal
Sampling signal input

Selection• None• %0V DO 01• %0V DO 02• %0V DO 03• %0V DO 04• %0V DO 05• %0V DO 06• %0V DO 07• %0V DO 08

Select the input for the sampling signal. The
fieldbus must be configured for this function.

Factory setting
None
Change signal
This item only appears ifbottle changeover is set
to fieldbus.

Selection• None• %0V DO 01• %0V DO 02• %0V DO 03• %0V DO 04• %0V DO 05• %0V DO 06• %0V DO 07• %0V DO 08

Select the input for the bottle change signal.

Factory setting
None

Endress+Hauser

115

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Menu/Setup/Sampling programs
Function
Enable subprogram

Options

Info

Selection• Immediate• Individual dates• Repeating date
• Interval• Event• External start• Deactivation• Fieldbus (optional)

Immediate
The subprogram is enabled immediately.

Factory setting
Immediate

Interval
Set the start condition, activity time andinactivity time for the subprogram.

Individual dates
Set the start and stop dates for enabling thesubprogram.
Repeating date
Set the start condition, activity time andrepetition interval for the subprogram.

Event
The subprogram is enabled by an event. Up
to three measuring signals are linked to forma start signal using "and"/"or" links.
External start
The subprogram is enabled by a pulse at abinary input configured accordingly.
Deactivation
Subprogram 2 or 2+n is started as soon as
subprogram 1 is disabled. Only possible withmultiple subprograms.
Fieldbus (optional)
The subprogram is enabled by a signal fromthe control system.
Having selected Enable subprogram Event
Start condition

Selection• No delay• Date/Time• TimeFactory setting
Date/TimeNo delay
The subprogram is started when the
program is enabled.
Date/Time
Set the start date and start time for enabling
the subprogram.
Time
Set the start time for enabling thesubprogram.

Activation event
Number of events

Selection
• 1
• 2
• 3

Specify how many measuring inputs (1‐3)
you want to link to generate an activation
signal.

Factory setting
1
Event editor 1
If you have more than one event editor, the "Event editor" menu item appears often. Use the "Link" menu
item to configure the logical link between the signals.
Source of data

Selection• None• Binary input S:x• Current input S:x• Temperature Input• Fieldbus

Select the input via which the activation
event is to be output. The inputs are
configured in the menu Setup Inputs. The
binary inputs are only visible if they havebeen configured accordingly (rainfall orflow).

Factory setting
None

116

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Menu/Setup/Sampling programs
Function

Options
Measured value

Info

Options (depends on
sensor/data source)• None• Totalized flow
• Current• Temperature• PROFIBUS AO 0x
Factory setting
None

Operating mode

Selection• Upper limit• Lower limit• Within range• Out of range• Rate of change

Type of limit value monitoring:• Limit value overshoot or undershoot• Measured value within or outside a range• Rate of change

Factory setting
Upper limit
Limit value

Range of adjustment andfactory setting
Depends on the measured
value

Operating mode = Above limit check or
Below limit check• The event is triggered if the limit value +hysteresis is exceeded for the switch-on
duration.
• The event is reset again if the limit value ‐hysteresis is undershot for the duration of
the switch-off delay at least.

Range lower value

Range of adjustment andfactory setting
Depends on the measured
value

Operating mode = In range check or Out ofrange check• The event is triggered if the range lower
value + hysteresis is exceeded for theswitch-on duration.
• The event is reset again if the range upper
value ‐ hysteresis is undershot for theduration of the switch-off delay at least.

Hysteresis

Range of adjustment andfactory setting
Depends on the measured
value

The hysteresis is the difference between theswitch-on point and the switch-off point if
values, which cause the limit switch to pickup, become closer or move further apart. It isneeded to ensure a stable switching
behavior.

Start delay

0 to 9999 s

Synonyms: pick-up and drop-out delay

Switch off delay

Factory setting
0s

Delta value

Range of adjustment andfactory setting
Depends on the measured
value

Delta time

00:01 ... 23:59

Range upper value

Factory setting
01:00
Auto confirm

Operating mode = Change rate
The event is triggered if the measured valuechanges by at least the delta value (bothpositive and negative) within the set deltatime. The event is deleted as soon as the rateof change is lower than the set value and theauto confirmation time has elapsed.

00:01 ... 23:59
Factory setting
01:00

Having selected Activation input External start

Endress+Hauser

117

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Menu/Setup/Sampling programs
Function
Activation input

Options

Info

Selection• No program part start input
configured• Binary input S:x

Select the input for start of the subprogram.
The binary input must be configured for thisfunction. Only the configured inputs are
displayed.

Factory setting
No program part start input
configured
Having selected Activation input PROFIBUS DPor Modbus:
Activation signal

Selection• None• PROFIBUS AO 0x

Enable subprogram via fieldbus.

Factory setting
Sample at enable(not for single sample
and sampling table andalso not for "Immediate"
and event)Selection
• Yes
• No

Sample at disable

Selection
• Yes
• No

Factory setting
Yes

Factory setting
No
Deactivation

Selection• Bottles full
• Enable invalid• Deactivation with event
Factory setting
Enable invalid

Specify whether the first sample should betaken directly when the subprogram isenabled. For example, with intervals, asample is taken at the start of every
activation interval.
Specify whether a sample should be taken
when the subprogram is disabled. For
example, with intervals, a sample is taken at
the end of every activation interval.

Select the disable function of thesubprogram:
Bottles full
The subprogram is disabled once all theassigned bottles have been filled.
Enable invalid
Disable via limit value
Deactivation with event
New parameter can be defined

Bottle change mode

Synchronize samplings

Selection
• No
• Yes

No
The bottle is changed following a disable/
enableFactory setting
Yes

Yes
When the cycle is finished, the system
continues filling the last bottle.

Selection• To subprogram start• To clock

To subprogram start
The intervals defined in the sampling modeare enabled when the subprogram is started.

Factory setting

To clock
The intervals defined in the sampling modeare enabled after a specific time. For
example, if 30 min is entered this meansthat the interval is only activated at a time ofxx:30.
--> You configure this time in the ""Offset
synchronization menu item.

118

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Menu/Setup/Sampling programs
Function
Bottle synchronization

Options

Info

Selection• None• 1. bottle change time• 1. Time of change + bottle
number• External BC sync input

Specific bottles can be assigned specificfilling times with the bottle synchronization
function. For example, bottle 1 is to be filledfrom midnight to 2 a.m., bottle 2 from 2 a.m.
to 4 a.m. etc..

Factory setting
None

None
The sampling and bottle change times are
not synchronized.
1. bottle change time
Sampling starts with the first bottle. Thechange to the next bottle is synchronized.
1. Time of change + bottle number
Each bottle is allocated a specific filling time.
External BC sync input
The system changes to the next bottle whenan external signal is received. The externalsignal first has to be configured via thebinary input. The binary input can then be
selected as the source.

Assignment bin. output

Selection• No binary output
configured• Binary output S:xAssignment of the binary output to theprogram cycle.

Factory setting
No binary output configured
Use "SAVE" to save the subprogram setup. Then press "ESC" to return to the main program.
InputsBottle assignment(only possible withmultiple bottles)
This menu item appears
when more than one
bottle is available,
regardless of the numberof subprograms.

Settings for the inputs can be made as
described in the "Inputs" section.
Selection• No bottle assignment• Dynamic bottle assignment• Statical bottle assignment• Statical bottle assignment

No bottle assignment:
Each subprogram fills the same bottle until
the bottle is full. All the subprograms thenchange to the next bottle. Only visible if
there is more than one subprogram.

Factory setting
Dynamic bottle assignment

Dynamic bottle assignment:
When the subprogram changes, the systemswitches to the next empty bottle
Statical bottle assignment:
A table can be used to assign a subprogram
to each bottle

Via the "Bottle change" menu item, the bottle change can be configured after a certain time or number ofsamples if bottle distribution with more than one bottle has been selected and either dynamic or static bottle
assignment has been selected.
Having selected Bottle assignmentStatical bottle assignment:
Bottle assignment table
Select a bottle and assign it a subprogram.

Programming example: Event program
The following example explains how to program a program change in the Event program.
Time-paced sampling• In a composite container• Daily emptying
Time-paced sampling• In a composite container• In individual bottles

Endress+Hauser

119Operation

Liquistation CSF48

8.0

A
B

1

1

2
A0014126

 73
A
B
1
2

Event-controlled samplingpH value: 8.0
pH value
Sampling into individual bottles when pH value > 8.0
Sampling into composite container when pH value < 8.0

Menu/Setup/Sampling programs/Setup program/New
Function

Entry for sample program

Advanced
Program nameTDTE 12+20

Bottle configuration

12x + 1x

Bottle volume left

1000 ml

Bottle volume right2000 mlStart condition

Immediate

Stop condition

Continuous

Bottle assignment

Statical bottle assignment

Setup subprogram: New
Programpart

TD1

Sampling mode

Time paced CTCV

Sampling interval

15 minSampling volume

100 mlMultiple bottles

1

Enable subprogram

Immediate

Sample at enable

Yes

Synchronize samplings

To subprogram start‐> "SAVE" ‐> "ESC"
Setup subprogram: New
Programpart

EE1

Sampling mode

Time paced CTCV

Sampling interval

6 minSampling volume

100 mlMultiple bottles Only if
Number of samples
Bottle assignment = Staticalbottle assignment is selectedin the main program
Samples per bottle

120

10

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Menu/Setup/Sampling programs/Setup program/New
Function

Entry for sample program

Multiple bottles

0

Enable subprogram

Event

Start condition

No delay

Activation event
Number of events

1

Event editor 1
Source of data

CH1: 1:1 pH glass

Measured value

pH

Operating mode

Upper limit

Limit value

pH 8.00

Hysteresis

pH 0.20

Start delay

0s

Switch off delay

0s

Sample at enable

Yes

Sample at disable

No

Deactivation

Enable invalid

Synchronize samplings

To subprogram start‐> "SAVE" ‐> "ESC" ‐> "ESC"
Bottle assignment
Bottle assignment table
Bottle 1...
Bottle 12
Bottle 13

EE1
EE1
TD1

‐> "ESC"
Press the "SAVE" soft key to save the program.

 In the overview, you can start the program created under "Select sampling program".
Programming example: Limit value-controlled program
The following example explains how to program a limit value-controlled sampling
program.
Flow-paced sampling
Individual bottles above the limit value
Time-paced sampling
Individual bottles below the limit value
When the subprogram changes, the system switches to the next bottle.
Menu/Setup/Sampling programs/Setup program/New
Function

Entry for sample program

Advanced

Endress+Hauser

Program nameUVT 12x3

Bottle configuration

12x

Bottle volume left

3000 ml

121

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Menu/Setup/Sampling programs/Setup program/New
Function

Entry for sample program

Start condition

Date/time

Start date

DD.MM.YYYY e.g. 03.06.2010

Start time

HH:MM:SS e.g. 12:00:00

Stop condition

Continuous

Setup subprogram: New
Programpart

VD1"SAVE" ‐ saves the "VD1" subprogram
Setup subprogram: New
Programpart

ZD1"SAVE" ‐ saves the "ZD1" subprogram"ESC" ‐ the main program is displayed
Bottle assignmentVD1

Dynamic bottle assignment

Setup subprogram: VD1
Edit
Sampling mode

Flow paced VTCV

Flow measurement

Current input S:1 (max. 15 samples/h = 4 min)Sampling interval

50 m3

Sampling volume

100 mlBottle change mode

Time

Time interval

06:00

Multiple bottles

0

Enable subprogram

External activation

Start condition

No delay

Activation event
Number of events

1

Event editor 1
Source of data

Current input S:1

Measured value

Flow rate

Operating mode

Upper limit

Limit value

155 l/s

Hysteresis

5 l/sStart delay

0s

Switch off delay

0s

Sample at enable

Yes

Sample at disable

No

Deactivation

Enable invalid

Synchronize samplings

To subprogram start

Setup subprogram:
Edit

122

Sampling mode

Time paced CTCV

Sampling interval

15 minSampling volume

100 mlEndress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Menu/Setup/Sampling programs/Setup program/New
Function

Entry for sample program
Bottle change mode

Time

Time interval

06:00

Multiple bottles

0

Enable subprogram

Event

Start condition

No delay

Activation event
Number of events

1

Event editor 1
Source of data

Current input S:1

Measured value

Flow rate

Operating mode

Lower limit

Limit value

150 l/s

Hysteresis

5 l/sStart delay

0s

Switch off delay

0s"ESC" - "ESC"
Sample at enable

Yes

Sample at disable

No

Stop condition

Enable invalid

Synchronize samplings

To subprogram start"ESC" ‐ "ESC"
Press the "SAVE" soft key to save the program.

 In the overview, you can start the program created under "Select sampling program".
10.3.4

Selecting and executing the program

In the overview, under Select sampling program you can see all the programs created.
Here you can also use New to create a new program.
Using the navigator, you can select the program you want to execute here and then choose
from the following menu items:• Edit• Start• Duplicate• Cancel
Setup program
FunctionEndress+Hauser

Info

Edit

The selected program is displayed and can be edited. Press the "SAVE"
button to save the changes.

DeleteThe selected program is deleted following a confirmation prompt.

123Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Setup program
Function

Info

Start

The selected program is started immediately. The program can becanceled or paused by pressing the OFFbutton. If there are differences
between the setup and the selected program, the Program configuration
contains errorsmessage appears, e.g. the bottle configuration in the
program does not match the configuration in the setup. The program is
not started. In this example, the actual bottle configuration must be
checked against the configuration in the setup and the program andchanged accordingly. Only the bottle configuration entered in the setup isvalid for the program to be executed.

Duplicate

The selected program is duplicated and saved with an ID.

CancelBack to the overview.

The Setup programdisplay features the ESC, MAN, ? and MODE softkeys.
The Program enableddisplay features the ESC, STAT and MODE softkeys.
Setup program
Function

Info

ESC

Back to the overview. Any program currently running is canceled.

MAN

Manual sampling can be configured and started here. Any program
currently running is paused. ‐> See "Sampling program/Manual sampling"
section?

A help text is displayed for the item.

STAT

For selecting statistics about measured values, sampling and inputs, see
the "Display behavior" section.

MODE

If no program is enabled, the device can be switched off here. If a programis enabled, the following options appear:
Power down sampler:
Following a confirmation prompt, the device is set to the standby mode.
Power continues to be supplied to the device and the LED flashes green.
The display goes dark.
Stop program %0V: 1)
Stops a program currently running following a confirmation prompt. The
overview display appears.
Pause program %0V:
Is selected if maintenance work is pending. The program is paused andthe pause time is entered in the logbook. After pressing the Resume
program button, the current program is continued.

1)"%0V" here stands for text that depends on the context. This text is generated automatically by thesoftware and inserted in place of %0V. In the simplest scenario, this could be the name of the measuring
channel, for example.

10.4

InputsAs standard, Liquistation CSF48 has:
• Two binary inputs• Two current inputs• Galvanically isolated from one another

10.4.1

Binary inputs

The binary inputs are used to control the sampler using external signals.

124

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

With the CSF48, the power supply of 24 V DC from the terminal block in the connection
compartment of the sampler can be used for floating contacts (see the "Electricalconnection" section).
Menu/Setup/Inputs
Function

Options

Info

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the function on or off

Binary input S:x
Mode

Factory setting
Off
Input variable

Selection• Flow rate
• Rainfall• External event• Armature end position
detection(only for version withsampling assembly)• Pulse input for connected flowmeters or
rain gages• Control of sampling functions via externalsignals

Factory setting
Flow rate
Having selected Input variable Flow rate
Signal slope

Selection• Low-High• High-Low

Preselect the level change of the signal.

Factory setting
Low-High
Unit

Selection
• m³
• l
• cf
• gal

Select the unit.

Factory setting
m³
Meas. value format

Factory setting#.#Specify the number of decimal places for theflow.

1 pulse =0 to 1000 m3

Definition of the pulse value, limits arecalculated depending on the unit

Factory setting
10 m3
Unit of totalized flow
Current totalized flow---

The totalized flow values are displayed.

Reset totalizer

Selection• Manual• Automatic• At program start

ManualReset the counter manually.

Factory setting
ManualAutomatic
The counter is reset automatically atintervals.
At program start
The counter is reset at program start.

Having selected Reset totalizer Manual
Reset totalized flow

ActionThe totalized flow currently calculated is set
to zero when the counter is reset.

Having selected Reset totalizer AutomaticEndress+Hauser

125

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Menu/Setup/Inputs
FunctionInterval

Options

Info

Selection• Daily• Weekly• Monthly

Daily
If a daily interval is selected, set the Time in
the following menu item.

Factory setting
Daily

WeeklyIf a weekly interval is selected, set the Dayof week and the Time in the following
menu items.
Monthly
If a monthly interval is selected, set the Dayof month and the Time in the following
menu items.

Time

00:00:00 ... 23:59:59
HH:MM:SS
Factory setting
12:00:00 HH:MM:SS

Having selected Input variable Rainfall
Signal slope

Selection• Low-High• High-Low

Preselect the level change of the signal.

Factory setting
Low-High
Unit

Selection• mm• inchSelect the unit.

Factory settingmm
Meas. value format

Factory setting#.#Specify the number of decimal places.

1 pulse =0.00 to 5.00 mm

Definition of the pulse value, limits arecalculated depending on the unit. The
correct switch value is provided in the
Operating Instructions of your rain gage.

Factory setting
1.0 mmIntensity

Selection• mm/min• mm/h• mm/dSelect the intensity per minute, hour or day
according to your requirements.

Factory setting
mm/minTotalized rainfall
Totalized rainfall---

The totalized rainfall is displayed.

Reset totalizer

Selection• Manual• Automatic• At program start

ManualReset the counter manually.

Factory setting
ManualAutomatic
The counter is reset automatically atintervals.
At program start
The counter is reset at program start.

Having selected Reset totalizer Manual
Reset totalized rainfall

ActionThe totalized rainfall currently calculated is
set to zero when the meter is reset
manually.

Having selected Reset totalizer Automatic126

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Menu/Setup/Inputs
FunctionInterval

Options

Info

Selection• Daily• Weekly• Monthly

Daily
If a daily interval is selected, set the Time in
the following menu item.

Factory setting
Daily

WeeklyIf a weekly interval is selected, set the Dayof week and the Time in the following
menu items.
Monthly
If a monthly interval is selected, set the Dayof month and the Time in the following
menu items.

Time

00:00:00 ... 23:59:59
HH:MM:SS
Factory setting
12:00:00 HH:MM:SS

Input variable External event
Signal slope

Selection• Low-High; High• High-Low; Low
Factory setting
Low-High; HighA signal slope or a signal state triggers thefunction assigned to the binary input. The
choice between signal slope and signal stateis performed automatically by the function
assigned to the binary input.

If Input variable Armature end position detection is selected (only for version with sampling assembly)
Position

Selection• Off• Front (sampling)• Back (dosing)

Setting specifying the assembly position(front or back) to which the end position
sensor is connected.

Factory setting
Off
Binary input assignment view

10.4.2

Overview of the outputs to which this binary
input is linked.

Current inputs

The current input must be assigned an analog signal for the functions described. Active
and passive current inputs are available to connect two-wire or four-wire devices.
For the correct wiring of the current inputs see the "Electrical connection" section →  26
Menu/Setup/Inputs
Function

Options

Info

Selection• Off• 0..20 mA• 4..20 mA

Enter the output signal of the connected
device: 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA.

Current input S:x
Mode

Factory setting
Off

Endress+Hauser

127

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Menu/Setup/Inputs
Function
Input variable

Options

Info

Selection• Flow rate
• Parameter• Current

Select the input variable.

Factory setting
Current

Flow rate
The input can be used as the source fortime/flow-paced or flow-paced sampling
programs.
Parameter
The input can be used as the source for limit
switches, logbooks and enabling anddisabling events for sampling programs.
Current
The input can be used as the source for limit
switches, logbooks and enabling anddisabling events for sampling programs. A
unit name cannot be specified.

If you select Input variable Flow rate
Unit of flow

Selection• l/s• m³/s• m³/h• m³/d
• cfs
• gpm
• gph
• mgd

Select the unit.

Factory settingl/s
Unit of totalized flow

Selection
• l
• m³
• cf
• gal

Select the unit for the totalized flow.

Factory setting
m³
Meas. value format

Factory setting#.#Specify the number of decimal places for theflow.

Minimum flow

0 to 10000 l/s

The set limit value prevents sampling if theflow falls below this value (only for time/flow-paced sampling).

Factory setting
0 l/s
Lower range value

0 to 10000 l/s
Factory setting
0 l/s

Upper range value

0 to 10000 l/s
Factory setting
100000 l/s

Damping

0 to 60 s
Factory setting
0sEnter a value for the start of the measuring
range. 0/4 mA is assigned to this value as
per your specifications.
Enter a value for the end of the measuring
range. 20 mA is assigned to this value as per
your specifications.
The damping causes a floating average curveof the measured values over the time
specified.

Totalized flow
totalized flow is calculated when the program is started if you use a sampling program with
 The
volume, flow-paced sampling or time/flow-paced sampling as the start condition. The samples aretaken based on this value. The current totalizer is used for calculating purposes if the totalized flow isused as the measured value for an enabling or disabling event.
Current totalized flow

128

---

The totalized flow values are displayed.

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Menu/Setup/Inputs
Function
Reset totalizer

Options

Info

Selection• Manual• Automatic• At program start

ManualReset the counter manually.

Factory setting
ManualFlow rate

Automatic
The counter is reset automatically atintervals.
At program start
The counter is reset at program start.

---

The current flow rate is displayed.

ActionThe totalized flow currently calculated is set
to zero when the counter is reset.

If you select Reset totalizer Manual
Reset totalized flow

If you select Reset totalizer AutomaticInterval

Selection• Daily• Weekly• Monthly
Factory setting
Daily

Daily
If a daily interval is selected, set the Time in
the following menu item.
WeeklyIf a weekly interval is selected, set the Dayof week and the Time in the following
menu items.
Monthly
If a monthly interval is selected, set the Dayof month and the Time in the following
menu items.

If you select Input variable Parameter
Meas. value format

Factory setting#.#Specify the number of decimal places.

Parameter nameUser-defined text

Assign a name.

Unit of measure

User-defined text

Enter the engineering unit.

Lower range value-20 to 10000

Enter a value for the start of the measuring
range. 0/4 mA is assigned to this value as
per your specifications.

Factory setting
0-20 to 10000
Factory setting
10
Upper range value

0 to 60 s
Factory setting
0sEnter a value for the end of the measuring
range. 20 mA is assigned to this value as per
your specifications.
The damping causes a floating average curveof the measured values over the time
specified.

If you select Input variable Current
Meas. value format

Factory setting#.#Specify the number of decimal places.

Damping

0 to 60 s

The damping causes a floating average curveof the measured values over the time
specified.

Factory setting
0s

10.5

Outputs

10.5.1

Binary outputs

The basic version of the device always has two binary outputs.

Endress+Hauser

129

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Possible application --> For outputting a manipulated variable to connected actuators
The binary output must be assigned in the program or subprogram before it can be
activated.
Menu/Setup/Outputs
Function

Options

Info

Selection• Off• Event• Limit value• Diagnostics message• Cleaning(Only for version withsensors with Memosens
protocol)The following functions depend on theoption selected. Function = "Off" switches off
the function of the binary output and meansno further settings are required.

OutputBinary
Function

Cleaning:
 For
The outputs can only switch 100mA. A
relay must be added to control valves
or motors.

Factory settingOff
If you select Function Event
Signal slope

Selection• Low-High• High-Low

Select the level change of the signal

Factory setting
Low-High

130

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Menu/Setup/Outputs
Function
Event

Options

Info

Selection• Program enabled• End of program• Sampling start• End of sampling• End of mult. samp.
• Dosing• Sampling cycle• Bottle change• External stop
• No sample• Sub program enabled• Sub prog. activ.
• Sub prog. deactiv.

Program enabled
A permanent signal is switched when thesampling program starts.

Factory setting
Sampling cycle

End of program
A pulse or permanent signal is switchedwhen the sampling program ends.
Sampling start
A pulse is switched when a sample is taken.
End of sampling
A pulse is switched when sampling has
ended.
End of mult. samp.
A pulse is switched when sampling of thelast multiple bottle has ended.
DosingA pulse is switched at the start of dosing.
Sampling cycle
The output signal is switched for theduration of the sampling cycle.
Bottle change
A pulse is switched when a bottle ischanged.
External stop
A pulse is switched when an external stop is
performed.
No sample
The output signal is switched if no sample
was taken.
Sub program enabled
The output signal is switched if thissubprogram is active.
Sub prog. activ.
The output signal is switched when the
subprogram starts.
Sub prog. deactiv.
The output signal is switched when the
subprogram ends.

If you select Function Limit value
Signal slope

Selection• Low-High• High-Low

Preselect the level change of the signal.

Factory setting
Low-High
Source of data

Selection• None• Limit switch 1-8
Factory setting
None

Select the limit switch via which the statusof the relay is to be output. The limit
switches are configured in the "Setup/
Additional functions/Limit switch" menu.

If you select Function Diagnostics message
Signal slope

Selection• Low-High• High-Low

Preselect the level change of the signal.

Factory setting
Low-High

Endress+Hauser

131

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Menu/Setup/Outputs
Function
Operating mode

Options

Info

Selection• as assigned• Namur M• Namur S• Namur C• Namur F

as assigned
If this option is selected, the diagnostics
messages which you have individuallyassigned to the binary output are output via
the binary output.

Factory setting
as assigned

Attributed diagnostic
messages

Namur M to F
If you decided to use one of the Namur
classes, all the messages that are assigned tothe individual class are output via the binary
output. You can also change the Namur classassignment for every diagnostic message.
(Menu/Setup/General settings/
Diagnostics/Device behavior or Menu/
Setup/Inputs/../Diagnostics settings/Diag.
behavior)

Read-only list of diagnostic All the messages assigned to the relay
messages
output appear on the display. You do nothave the option of editing the information
here.

If you select Function Cleaning (only for version with sensors with the Memosens protocol)
Signal slope

Selection• Low-High• High-Low

Preselect the level change of the signal.

Factory setting
Low-High
Assignment

Selection• None• Cleaning 1-4

Use this function to choose the cleaning
instance which should be started when thebinary output is active.

Factory settingNone

10.5.2Current outputs

Two current outputs are optionally available on the base module‐E.
Setting the current output range‣ Menu/Setup/General settings: 0..20 mA or 4..20 mA.
Possible applications• For outputting a measured value to a process control system or an external recorder• For outputting a manipulated variable to connected actuators
The current output curve is always linear.
Menu/Setup/Outputs/Current output x:y 1)
Function

Options

Info

Current output

Selection
• Off
• On

Use this function to activate or deactivate avariable being output at the current output

Factory setting
Off
Source of data

Selection• None• Connected inputs• Temperature sensors

The sources of data on offer depend on yourdevice version.

Factory setting
None

132

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Menu/Setup/Outputs/Current output x:y 1)
Function

Options

Info

Measured value

Selection• None• Depends on the Sourceof data

The measured value you can select depends on
the option selected under Source of data.

Factory setting
Nonelist of dependent measured values is provided in the Measured value table, subject to the Source of The
data→  133.
Range lower value
Range upper value

Hold behavior

Range of adjustment andfactory settings depend on
the Measured value

You can output the entire measuring range orjust some of it at the current output. To do so,
specify the upper and lower range values inaccordance with your requirements.

Selection• Freeze last value• Fixed value• IgnoreFreeze last value
The device freezes the last current value.

Factory setting
Depends on thechannel:output
Hold current

0.0 to 23.0 mA

Hold behavior = Fixed value

Factory setting
22.0 mA

1)

Fixed value
You define a fixed current value that is output at
the output.
IgnoreA hold does not affect this current output.

‣ Specify which current should be output at
this current output in the hold state.

x:y = slot:output number

Measured value depending on the Source of data
Source of data

Measured value

pH Glass

Selection• Raw value mV• pH• Temperature

pH ISFET

ORP

Selection• Temperature• ORP mV
• ORP %

Oxygen (amp.)

Selection• Temperature• Partial pressure• Concentration liquid• Saturation• Raw value nA(only Oxygen (amp.))• Raw value μs(only Oxygen (opt.))

Oxygen (opt.)

Cond iCond cCond c 4-polDisinfection

Endress+Hauser

Selection• Temperature• Conductivity• Resistance(only Cond c)• Concentration(only Cond i and Cond c 4-pol)
Selection• Temperature• Sensor current• Concentration

133

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Source of data

Measured value

ISE

Selection• Temperature• pH• Ammonium• Nitrate• Potassium• Chloride

TU/TS

Selection• Temperature• Turbidity g/l(only TU/TS)• Turbidity FNU(only TU/TS)• Turbidity Formazine(only TU)
• Turbidity solid(only TU)

TU

NitrateSelection• Temperature• NO3• NO3-N

Ultrasonic interface

Selection
Interface

SAC

Selection• Temperature• SAC• Transm.
• Absorption
• COD
• BOD

Current input 1 ... 3

Selection• Bipolar(only for current outputs)• Unipolar+• Unipolar-

Temperature 1 ... 3

Mathematical functions All the mathematical functions can also be used as a data source and the calculated
value can be used as the measured value.

10.5.3

Alarm relays and optional relays Functions of the optional
binary outputs

The basic version of the device always has one alarm relay. Additional relays are alsoavailable depending on the version of the device.
The following functions can be output via a relay:• Limit switch status• Controller manipulated variable for controlling an actuator• Diagnostic messages• Status of a cleaning function in order to control a pump or a valve
You can assign a relay to multiple inputs in order to clean several sensors with justone cleaning unit, for example.

134

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Menu/Setup/Outputs/Alarm relay or relay at channel no.
Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection• Off• Limit switch• Controller• Diagnostics• Cleaning(sensor)• Formula(sensor)

The following functions depend on the option
selected.
These versions are illustrated individually in thefollowing sections to provide a clearer
understanding of the options.
Function = Off
Switches off the relay function and means nofurther settings are required.

Factory setting• Alarm relays:
Diagnostics• Other relays:
Off

Outputting the status of a limit switch
Function = Limit switch
Function

Options

Info

Source of data

Selection
Limit switch 1 ... 8

Select the limit switch via which the status of therelay is to be output.

Factory setting
None

The limit switches are configured in the menu:
Setup/Additional functions/Limit switches.
the ALL and NONE soft keys to select Useor deselect all the limit switches in one go.

Hold behavior

Selection• Freeze last value• Fixed value• Ignore
Factory setting
IgnoreOutputting diagnostic messages via the relay
If a relay is defined as a diagnostic relay (Function = Diagnostics), it works in the "failsafe mode".
This means that the relay is always energized ("normally closed", n.c.) in the basic state if
an error is not present. In this way it can also indicate a drop in voltage, for example.
The alarm relay always works in the failsafe mode.
You can output two categories of diagnostic messages via the relay:• Diagnostic messages from one of the 4 Namur classes• Diagnostic messages which you have individually assigned to the relay output
A message is individually assigned to the relay output at 2 specific points in the menu:• Menu/Setup/General settings/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag. behavior(device-specific messages)• Menu/Setup/Inputs/<Sensor>/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag. behavior(sensor-specific messages)
Before being able to assign the relay output to a special message in Diag. behavior
you must first configure Outputs/Relay x:y or /Alarm relay/Function = Diagnostics .

Endress+Hauser

135

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Function = Diagnostics
Function

Options

Info

Operating mode

Selection• as assigned• Namur M• Namur S• Namur C• Namur F

as assigned
If this option is selected, the diagnostic messages
which you have individually assigned to the relay
are output via the relay.

Factory setting• Relay:as assigned• Alarm relays:
Namur F

Attributed diagnostic messages Read only
Operating mode = asassigned

Namur M ... Namur F
If you decided to use one of the Namur classes,
all the messages that are assigned to theindividual class are output via the relay. You canalso change the Namur class assignment forevery diagnostic message.
(Menu/Setup/General settings/Extended
setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag. behavior or
Menu/Setup/Inputs/<Sensor>/Extended
setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag. behavior)
All the messages assigned to the relay output
appear on the display. You do not have theoption of editing the information here.

Outputting the status of a cleaning function
Function = Cleaning
Function

Options

Info

Assignments

Selection• None• Depends on the type ofcleaning

Here you can specify how a cleaning function
should be displayed for the relay.

Factory setting
None

Hold behavior

Selection• Freeze last value• Fixed value• Ignore
Factory setting
Ignore1)

You have the following options depending on thecleaning program that is selected (Menu/Setup/
Additional functions/Cleaning:• Cleaning type = Standard clean
Cleaning 1 - Water, Cleaning 2 - Water,
Cleaning 3 - Water, Cleaning 4 - Water• Cleaning type = Chemoclean
Cleaning 1 - Water, Cleaning 1 - Cleaner,
Cleaning 2 - Water, Cleaning 2 - Cleaner,
Cleaning 3 - Water, Cleaning 3 - Cleaner,
Cleaning 4 - Water, Cleaning 4 - Cleaner• Cleaning type = Chemoclean Plus
4x Cleaning 1 - %0V, 4x Cleaning 2 - %0V 1)
Freeze last value
The device freezes the last measured value.
Fixed value
You define a fixed measured value that is output
at the output.
IgnoreA hold has no effect.

%0V is variable text which you can assign in Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning/Chemoclean
Plus/Output label 1 ... 4.

10.5.4

HART

Specify which device variables should be output via HART communication.
You can define a maximum of 16 device variables.

136

1.

Specify the data source.
 You can choose from sensor inputs and controllers.

2.

Select the measured value to be output.

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

3.

Specify the behavior in "Hold" status. (Configuration options of Source of data,
Measured value and Hold behavior) →  133

Please note that if you select Hold behavior = Freeze , the system not only flags the status
but also actually "freezes" the measured value.
More information is provided in:Operating Instructions "HART Communication", BA00486C

10.5.5PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET

Device variables (device → PROFIBUS/PROFINET)
Here you can specify which process values should be mapped to the PROFIBUS function
blocks and are thereby available for transmission via PROFIBUS communication.
You can define a maximum of 16 device variables (AI Blocks).
1.

Define the data source.
 You can choose from sensor inputs, current inputs and mathematical functions.

2.

Choose the measured value to be transmitted.

3.

Define how the device should behave in the hold state. (Configuration options ofSource of data, Measured value and Hold behavior) →  133

Please note that if you select Hold behavior= Freeze , the system not only flags the status
but also actually "freezes" the measured value.
In addition, you can define 8 binary variables (DI Blocks):
1.

Define the data source.

2.

Select the limit switch or relay whose status is to be transmitted.

PROFIBUS/PROFINET variables (PROFIBUS/PROFINET → device)
A maximum of 4 analog (AO) and 8 digital (DO) PROFIBUS variables are available asmeasured values in the controller, limit switch or current output menus.
Example: Using an AO or DO value as the set point for the controller
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Controller 1
1.

In the specified menu, define PROFIBUS as the data source.

2.

Select the desired analog output (AO) or digital output (DO) as the measured value.
Further information on "PROFIBUS" can be found in the Guideline for Communication
via PROFIBUS, SD01188C
Further information on "PROFINET" can be found in the Guideline for Communication
via PROFINET, SD02490C

10.5.6

EtherNet/IP

Specify which process values should be output via EtherNet/IP communication.
You can define a maximum of 16 analog device variables (AI).

Endress+Hauser

1.

Define the data source.
 You can choose from sensor inputs and controllers.

2.

Select the measured value to be output.

3.

Define how the device should behave in the hold state. (Configuration options ofSource of data, Measured value and Hold behavior) →  133
137

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

4.

In the case of controllers, also specify the type of manipulated variable.

Please note that if you select Hold behavior = Freeze , the system not only flags the status
but also actually "freezes" the measured value.
In addition you can define digital device variables (DI):‣ Define the data source.
 You can choose from relays, binary inputs and limit switches.
For further information on "EtherNet/IP", see the Guideline for Communication via
EtherNet/IP, SD01293C

10.6

Additional functions

10.6.1

Limit switch

There are different ways to configure a limit switch:• Assigning a switch-on and switch-off point• Assigning a switch-on and switch-off delay for a relay• Setting an alarm threshold and also outputting an error message• Starting a cleaning function
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Limit switches/Limit switch 1 ... 8
Function

Options

Info

Source of data

Selection• None• Sensor inputs• Binary inputs• Controller• Fieldbus signals• Mathematical functions• MRS set 1 ... 2‣ Specify the input or output which is to be thedata source for the limit switch.

The sources of data on offer depend on yourdevice version.
You can choose from connected sensors, binary
inputs, fieldbus signals, mathematical functions,controllers and sets for measuring range
switching.

Factory setting
None
Measuring value

Selection
Depends on:
Source of data

‣ Select the measured value, see the following
table.

Measured value depending on the Source of data
Source of data

Measured value

pH Glass

Selection• Raw value mV• pH• Temperature

pH ISFET

ORP

Selection• Temperature• ORP mV
• ORP %

Oxygen (amp.)

Selection• Temperature• Partial pressure• Concentration liquid• Saturation• Raw value nA(only Oxygen (amp.))• Raw value μs(only Oxygen (opt.))

Oxygen (opt.)

138

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Source of data

Measured value

Cond i

Selection• Temperature• Conductivity• Resistance(only Cond c)• Concentration(only Cond i and Cond c 4-pol)Cond cCond c 4-polDisinfection

Selection• Temperature• Sensor current• Concentration

ISE

Selection• Temperature• pH• Ammonium• Nitrate• Potassium• Chloride

TU/TS

Selection• Temperature• Turbidity g/l(only TU/TS)• Turbidity FNU(only TU/TS)• Turbidity Formazine(only TU)
• Turbidity solid(only TU)

TU

NitrateSelection• Temperature• NO3• NO3-N

Ultrasonic interface

Selection
Interface

SAC

Selection• Temperature• SAC• Transm.
• Absorption
• COD
• BOD

Current input 1 ... 3

Selection• Bipolar(only for current outputs)• Unipolar+• Unipolar-

Temperature 1 ... 3

Mathematical functions All the mathematical functions can also be used as a data source and the calculated
value can be used as the measured value.

You can monitor the manipulated variable by assigning the controller manipulated
variable to a limit switch (e. g. configure a dosing time alarm).

Endress+Hauser

139

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Limit switches/Limit switch 1 ... 8
Function

Options

Info

Cleaning program

Selection• None• Cleaning 1 ... 4

Use this function to choose which cleaning
instance should start when the limit switch isactive.

Factory setting
None
Function

Selection
• Off
• On

Activating/deactivating the limit switch

Factory setting
Off
Operating mode

Selection• Above limit check• Below limit check• In range check• Out of range check• Change rate

Type of limit value monitoring:• Limit value overshoot or undershoot→  74
• Measured value within or outside a range→  75• Rate of change →  77

Factory setting
Above limit check
Limit value

Settings depend on themeasured value

Operating mode = Above limit check or Below
limit check

A

B

MV

MV
2

1

1

2
t1

t2

t3

t4

t5

t

t1

t2

t3

t4

t5

t
A0028523

 74

Exceeding (A) and undershooting (B) a limit value (without hysteresis and switch-on delay)

1
Limit value
2
Alarm range
t1,3,5 No action
t2,4 An event is generated• If measured values (MV) are increasing, the relay contact is closed when the switch-on point is exceeded(Limit value + Hysteresis) and the start delay (Start delay) has elapsed.
• If measured values are decreasing, the relay contact is reset when the switch-off point is undershot (Limitvalue - Hysteresis) and after the drop-out delay (Switch off delay).

140

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Limit switches/Limit switch 1 ... 8
Function

Options

Info

Range lower value

Settings depend on themeasured value

Operating mode = Out of range check or In
range check

Range upper value
A

B

MV

MV
3

1

1
3

2

2
3
t1

t2

t3

t4

t1

t

t2

t3

t4

t
A0028524

 75
1
2
3
t1-4

Range monitoring outside (A) and within (B) a range (without hysteresis and switch-on delay)

End of range
Start of range
Alarm range
An event is generated• If measured values (MV) are increasing, the relay contact is closed when the switch-on point is exceeded(Range lower value + Hysteresis) and the start delay (Start delay) has elapsed.
• If measured values are decreasing, the relay contact is reset when the switch-off point is undershot (Range
upper value - Hysteresis) and after the drop-out delay (Switch off delay).
Hysteresis

Settings depend on themeasured value

The hysteresis is needed to ensure a stableswitching behavior.
The device software adds or subtracts the value
set here to/from the limit value (Limit value,
Range lower value or Range upper value). This
results in double the Hysteresis value for thehysteresis range around the limit value. An
event is then only generated if the measured
value (MV) completely passes through thehysteresis range.

MV
2
1

3

t1

t2

Operating mode ≠ Change ratet
A0028525

 76
1
2
3
t1,2

Hysteresis taking the example of limit value
overshootLimit value
Alarm range
Hysteresis range
An event is generated

Start delay

0 to 9999 s

Operating mode ≠ Change
rate

Factory setting
0s

Synonyms: pick-up and drop-out delay

Switch off delay
Operating mode ≠ Change
rate

Endress+Hauser

141

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Limit switches/Limit switch 1 ... 8
Function

Options

Info

Delta value

Settings depend on themeasured value

Operating mode = Change rate

Delta time

00:00:01 ... 23:59:00
Factory setting
01:00:00

Auto confirm

00:01 to 23:59
Factory setting
00:01

MV

Events are triggered by the following conditionsin the example given:t2 - t1 < Delta time and ∆MV1 > Delta value
t4 - t3 >Auto confirm and ∆MV2 < Delta value
t6 - t5 < Delta time and ∆MV3 > Delta value

MV2
MV3
MV1

t1 t2 t3

t4

t5 t6

The slope of the measured value (MV) is
monitored in this mode.
If, in the specified time frame (Delta time), themeasured value increases or decreases by morethan the specified value (Delta value), an event
is generated. No further event is generated if thevalue continues to experience such a steep
increase or decrease. If the slope is back below
the limit value, the alarm status is reset after apreset time (Auto confirm).

tA0028526

 77

Rate of change

10.6.2

Sensor cleaning programs

LCAUTION
Programs not switched off during maintenance activities.
Risk of injury due to medium or cleaning agent!
‣ Quit any programs that are active.
‣ Switch to the service mode.
‣ If testing the cleaning function while cleaning is in progress, wear protective clothing,goggles and gloves or take other suitable measures to protect yourself.
Selecting the type of cleaning
The user can choose from the following cleaning types:• Standard clean• Chemoclean• Chemoclean Plus
State of cleaning: Indicates whether the cleaning program is active or not. This is for
information purposes only.
Selecting the cleaning type

142

1.

Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning: Select a cleaning program.
 You can configure 4 different types of cleaning which you can assign individuallyto the inputs.

2.

Cleaning type: For each cleaning program decide which type of cleaning should be
performed.

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Standard cleaningStandard cleaning involves cleaning a sensor with compressed air, for instance, as
performed with the ion-selective sensor CAS40D (connection of cleaning unit for→  44CAS40D)
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning/Cleaning 1 ... 4/Standard clean
Function

Options

Info

Cleaning time

5 to 600 s

Cleaning duration
The cleaning duration and interval depend on
the process and sensor.

Factory setting
10 s‣ Determine the variables empirically or basedon experience.

‣ Define the cleaning cycle→  145.
Chemoclean
An example is the use of the CYR10 injector unit to clean pH glass sensors. (CYR10
connection →  44)
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning/Cleaning 1 ... 4/Chemoclean
Function

Options

Info

Cleaning time

0 to 900 s

Cleaning duration

Factory setting
5s

Endress+Hauser

Prerinse time

0 to 900 s

Postrinse time

Factory setting
0s

The cleaning duration, pre-rinse and post-rinse
times and the interval depend on the process
and sensor. Determine the variables empiricallyor based on experience.

143Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Chemoclean Plus
An example is the use of the CYR10 injector unit to clean pH glass sensors. (CYR10
connection →  44)
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning/Cleaning 1 ... 4/Chemoclean Plus/ChemoCleanPlus setup
Function

Options

Info

Cleaning steps setup

Table to create a time
program

You define a maximum of 30 program steps
which should be performed one after the other.
For each step enter the duration [s] and the state(0 = "off", 1 = "on") of each relay or output. You
can specify the number and name of the outputs
further down in the menu.
See below for an example of programming.

Failsafe step setup

Table view

‣ In the table specify the states that the relays
or outputs should assume in the event of anerror.

Limit contacts‣ Select the number of digital input signals

0 to 2(e. g. from limit position switches of theretractable assembly).

Limit contact 1 ... 2

Outputs

Selection• Binary inputs• Fieldbus signals‣ Define the signal source for each limit

0 to 4‣ Select the number of outputs that actuators,

position switch.

such as valves or pumps, should activate.

Output label 1 ... 4

Free text

You can assign a meaningful name to each
output, e. g. "assembly", "cleaner 1", "cleaner 2",
etc.

Programming example: regular cleaning with water and 2 cleaning agents
Limit switch

Duration [s] Assembly
CPA87xWater

Cleaner 1

Cleaner 2

ES1 1

5

1

1

0

0

ES2 1

5

1

1

0

0

0

30

1

1

0

0

0

5

1

1

1

0

0

60

1

0

0

0

0

30

1

1

0

0

0

5

1

1

0

1

0

60

1

0

0

0

0

30

1

1

0

0

ES1 0

5

0

1

0

0

ES2 0

5

0

1

0

0

0

5

0

0

0

0

The pneumatic retractable assembly, e.g. CPA87x, is activated by compressed air via a twoway valve. As a result, the assembly assumes either the "Measure" position (sensor in
medium) or the "Service" position (sensor in rinse chamber). Media such as water orcleaning agents are supplied via valves or pumps. Here there are two states: 0 (= "off" or"closed") and 1 (= "on" or "open").
The hardware required for "Chemoclean Plus", such as control valves, pumps,
compressed air supply, media supply etc., must be provided by the customer.

144

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Defining the cleaning cycle
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning/Cleaning 1 ... 4
Function

Options

Info

Cleaning cycle

Selection• Off• Interval• Weekly program‣ Choose from a cleaning routine that isrestarted at set intervals and a userdefinable weekly program.

Factory setting
Weekly program
Cleaning interval
Cleaning cycle = Interval

0-00:01 to 07-00:00(D-hh:mm)
Factory setting
1-00:00

Daily event times
Cleaning cycle = Weekly
programWeekdays
Cleaning cycle = Weekly
program

The interval value can be between 1 minute and7 days.
Example: You have set the value "1‐00:00". Eachday, the cleaning cycle starts at the same time
you started the first cleaning cycle.

00:00 to 23:59(HH:MM)

1.

Define up to 6 times (Event time 1 ... 6).
 You can then choose from these foreach day of the week.

Selection
Monday ... Sunday2.

Choose individually for each day of theweek which of the 6 times should be used
for a cleaning routine on this particularday.

This allows you to create weekly programs thatare perfectly adapted to suit your process.

Other settings and manual cleaning
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning/Cleaning 1 ... 4
Function

Options

Info

Start signal

Selection• None• Fieldbus signals• Signals of digital or
analog inputs

In addition to cyclic cleaning, you can also use an
input signal to start event-controlled cleaning.

Factory setting
None

Hold

Selection
• Off
• On
Factory settingOnprocess here.

Interval and weekly programs are executed as
normal, i. e. conflicts can occur. Priority is given
to the cleaning program that was the first to be
started.

‣ Decide whether there should be a holdduring the cleaning process. This holdaffects the inputs to which this cleaning
process is assigned.

Start single

ActionStart an individual cleaning process with theselected parameters. If cyclical cleaning isenabled, there are times in which it is notpossible to manually start the process.

Stop or Stop failsafe

ActionEnd the cleaning process (cyclically or manually)

Outputs
Cleaning programassignment view

Endress+Hauser‣ Choose the trigger for such a cleaning

Goes to the menu Outputs
Shows an overview of the cleaning processes

145

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

10.6.3

Cleaning programs, sampling technology

LCAUTION
Risk of injury due to medium or cleaning agent
Cleaning not switched off during calibration or maintenance activities‣ If a cleaning system is connected, switch if off before removing a sensor from themedium.
If‣ you wish to check the cleaning function and have therefore not switched off thecleaning system, please wear protective clothing, goggles and gloves or take otherappropriate measures.
Dosing chamber rinsing
The sampler must be ordered with TSP modification 71265624 to commission thisfunction.
The following hardware changes have already been made:4R
R1 R2 R3 R4

H 2O
A0025513

 78

Cleaning valve

Control of cleaning valve via relay R4 for dosing
chamber rinsing.

CSFxx
+

245

246

CSFxx
291

-

292

A0025515

 79

Cleaning valve

Binary output S:2 is configured for "End ofsampling". or "Bottle change" and is connected tobinary input S:2 which starts the Chemoclean Plus
function.

Cleaning/rinsing the dosing glass
1.

146

Select Menu/Setup/Inputs/Binary input and configure binary input S:2.

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

MenuSetup/Inputs/Binary input
Function

Entry for sample program

MODE

On

Input variable

External signal-> Control of sampling functions via external signals

Having selected input variable External signal:
Operation

Start cleaning-> A pulse triggers the cleaning.

Signal slope

Low-High
Factory setting: Low-High.

2.

Select Menu/Setup/Additional functions and configure the binary output:

MenuSetup/Inputs/Outputs
Function

Entry for sample program

Having selected input variable Binary output
Mode

Event
Factory setting: Off

Having selected input variable Event:
Slope of signal

Low-High
Factory setting: Low-High.

Event

End of sampling
A pulse is switched when sampling has ended.
Bottle change
A pulse is switched when a bottle is changed.

3.

Select Menu/Setup/Additional functions and configure the binary output:

MenuSetup/Inputs/Additional functions/Cleaning/Cleaning 1

Endress+Hauser

Function

Entry for sample program

Cleaning type

Chemoclean Plus
Dosing chamber rising is only enabled in this way

Cleaning steps setup

Table to create a time program: You define a maximum of 30
program steps which should be performed one after the other. For
each step, enter the duration [s] and the state (0="off", 1="on") for
each relay or output. You can specify the number and name of theoutputs further down in the menu. See below for program
examples.

Failsafe step setup

Table view:
In the table specify the states that the relays or outputs should
assume in the event of an error.

Outputs

1
Select the number of outputs that the actuators, such as valves or
pumps, should activate. 0....4

Output label 1

Test (out 1)
You can assign a meaningful name to each output, e.g.: "assembly","acid", "base" etc.

147

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Example of a cleaning phase table#

Duration (s)

Water

Info

1

5

0

Arm at tundish

2

5

1

Water valve

3

5

0

Drip time

The distribution arm only goes to the bottle at the next sampling.
MenuSetup/Inputs/Additional functions/Cleaning/Cleaning 1/Chemoclean Plus/ChemoCleanPlus setup
Function

Entry for sample program

Cleaning cycle

Off
Only active via external controller.

Start signal

Binary input
Select the sensors and their measured variables that should be usedas the minuend (Y1) or subtrahend (Y2).

Start signal

Binary input
The input must be selected beforehand.

Outputs4.

OutputRelay

Cleaning

Assignment

Cleaning 1 - Out 1 Press the navigator to confirm.

Please check the function in Menu/Setup/Output/Relay %0V .

10.6.4

Other settings and manual cleaning

Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning/Cleaning 1 ... 4
Function

Options

Info

Start signal

Selection• None• Fieldbus signals• Signals of digital or
analog inputs

In addition to cyclic cleaning, you can also use an
input signal to start event-controlled cleaning.

Factory setting
None

Hold

Selection
• Off
• On
Factory settingOnprocess here.

Interval and weekly programs are executed as
normal, i. e. conflicts can occur. Priority is given
to the cleaning program that was the first to be
started.

‣ Decide whether there should be a holdduring the cleaning process. This holdaffects the inputs to which this cleaning
process is assigned.

Start single

ActionStart an individual cleaning process with theselected parameters. If cyclical cleaning isenabled, there are times in which it is notpossible to manually start the process.

Stop or Stop failsafe

ActionEnd the cleaning process (cyclically or manually)

Outputs
Cleaning programassignment view

148

‣ Choose the trigger for such a cleaning

Goes to the menu Outputs
Shows an overview of the cleaning processes

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

10.6.5Mathematical functions

In addition to "real" process values, which are provided by connected physical sensors or
analog inputs, mathematical functions can be used to calculate a maximum of 8 "virtual"
process values.
The "virtual" process values can be:• Output via a current output or a fieldbus• Used as a controlled variable• Assigned as a measured variable to a limit switch• Used as a measured variable to trigger cleaning• Displayed in user-defined measuring menus
Difference
You can subtract the measured values of two sensors and use the result to detect incorrect
measurements, for example.
To calculate a difference, you must use two measured values with the same engineering
unit.
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Mathematical functions/MF1 to 8/Mode = Difference
Function

OptionsInfo

Calculation

Selection
• Off
• On

On/off switch for the function

Factory setting
Off
Y1
Measured value

The options depend on thesensors connected

Select the sensors and measured variables thatshould function as the minuend (Y1) or
subtrahend (Y2).

Read only

View this value in a user-defined measuring
screen or output the value via the current output.

Y2
Measured value
Difference value
Mathematical function
assignment view

Overview of the configured functions

Redundancy
Use this function to monitor two or three sensors with redundant measurements. The
arithmetic average of the two closest measured values is calculated and output as theredundancy value.
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Mathematical functions/MF1 to 8/Mode = Redundancy
Function

OptionsInfo

Calculation

Selection
• Off
• On

On/off switch for the function

Factory setting
Off
Y1
Measured value
Y2
Measured value
Y3 (optional)

The options depend on thesensors connected

You can select a maximum of 3 different types of
sensor that output the same measured value.
Example for temperature redundancy
You have a pH sensor and an oxygen sensor at
inputs 1 and 2. Select the pH sensor as Y1 andthe oxygen sensor as Y2. Measured value: SelectTemperature in each case.

Measured value

Endress+Hauser

149

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Mathematical functions/MF1 to 8/Mode = Redundancy
Function

Options

Info

Deviation control

Selection
• Off
• On

You can monitor the redundancy. Specify an
absolute limit value that must not be exceeded.

Factory setting
Off
Deviation limit

Depends on the selected
measured value

Redundancy

Read only

Mathematical function
assignment view

View this value in a user-defined measuring
screen or output the value via the current output.
Overview of the configured functions

rH valueTo calculate the rH value, a pH sensor and an ORP sensor must be connected. It isirrelevant whether you are using a pH glass sensor, an ISFET sensor or the pH electrode ofan ISE sensor.
Instead of the mathematical functions, you can also connect a combined pH/ORP sensor.

‣ Set the main measured value simply to rH.
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Mathematical functions/MF1 to 8/Mode = rH calculation
Function

OptionsInfo

Calculation

Selection
• Off
• On

On/off switch for the function

Factory settingOff
pH source

Connected pH sensor

ORP source

Connected ORP sensor

Calculated rH

Read only

Mathematical function
assignment viewSet the input for the pH sensor and the input for
the ORP sensor. Measured value interrogation is
obsolete as you must select pH or ORP mV.
View this value in a user-defined measuring
screen or output the value via the current output.
Overview of the configured functions

Degassed conductivity
Carbon dioxide from the air can be a contributing factor to the conductivity of a medium.
The degassed conductivity is the conductivity of the medium excluding the conductivity
caused by carbon dioxide.
Advantages of using degassed conductivity taking the example of a power station:• The conductivity caused by corrosion products or contamination in the feed water isdetermined as soon as the turbines are started. The system excludes the initially highconductivity values resulting from the ingress of air.
• If carbon dioxide is regarded as non-corrosive, the live steam can be directed to theturbine far earlier during startup.
• If the conductivity value increases during normal operation, it is possible to immediately
determine an ingress of coolant or air by calculating the degassed conductivity.

150

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Mathematical functions/MF1 to 8/Mode = Degassed conductivity
Function

OptionsInfo

Calculation

Selection
• Off
• On

On/off switch for the function

Factory setting
Off
Cation conductivity

Connected conductivity
sensorDegassed conductivity

Connected conductivity
sensorCO2 concentration

Read only

Mathematical function
assignment view

Cation conductivity represents the sensor
downstream from the cation exchanger andupstream from the "degassing module",
Degassed conductivity represents the sensor at
the outlet of the degassing module.
Measured value interrogation is obsolete as you
can only choose conductivity.
View this value in a user-defined measuring
screen or output the value via the current output.
Overview of the configured functions

Dual conductivity
You can subtract two conductivity values and use the result to monitor the efficiency of anion exchanger, for example.
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Mathematical functions/MF1 to 8/Mode = Dual conductivity
Function

OptionsInfo

Calculation

Selection
• Off
• On

On/off switch for the function

Factory setting
Off
Inlet
Measured value

The options depend on thesensors connected

Select the sensors that should function as theminuend (Inlet, e.g. sensor upstream from theion exchanger) or subtrahend (Outlet, e.g.
sensor downstream from the ion exchanger).

Selection• Auto• #• #.#• #.##• #.###

Specify the number of decimal places.

OutletMeasured value
Main value format

Factory setting
AutoCond. unit

Selection• Auto• µS/cm• mS/cm• S/cm• µS/m• mS/m• S/mFactory setting
Auto

Dual conductivity
Mathematical function
assignment view

Endress+Hauser

Read only

View this value in a user-defined measuring
screen or output the value via the current output.
Overview of the configured functions

151

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Calculated pH value
The pH value can be calculated from the measured values of two conductivity sensors
under certain conditions. Areas of application include power stations, steam generatorsand boiler feedwater.
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Mathematical functions/MF1 to 8/Mode = pH calculation fromconductivity
Function

OptionsInfo

Calculation

Selection
• Off
• On

On/off switch for the function

Factory setting
Off
MethodSelection• NaOH• NH3• LiOHThe calculation is performed on the basis of
Guideline VGB‐R‐450L of the Technical
Association of Large Power Plant Operators(Verband der Großkesselbetreiber, (VGB)).

Factory setting
NaOH

NaOH
pH = 11 + log {(κv - 1/3 κh)/273}
NH3
pH = 11 + log {(κv - 1/3 κh)/243}
LiOH
pH = 11 + log {(κv - 1/3 κh)/228}
κv ... Inlet ... direct conductivity
κh ... Outlet ... acid conductivity

Inlet
Measured value

The options depend on thesensors connected

OutletInlet
Sensor upstream from the cation exchanger,"direct conductivity"
OutletSensor downstream from the cation exchanger,"acid conductivity"

Measured value

Selection of the measured value is obsolete as it
must always be Conductivity.
Calculated pH

Read only

Mathematical function
assignment view

View this value in a user-defined measuring
screen or output the value via the current output.
Overview of the configured functions

Formula (optional, with activation code)
With the formula editor, it is possible to calculate a new value from a maximum of 3
measured values. A wide range of mathematical and logical (Boolean) operations areavailable for this purpose.
The Liquiline firmware offers you a powerful mathematics tool with the formula
editor. You are responsible for the feasibility of your formula, and therefore for thefeasibility of the result.

152

SymbolOperation

Type of operands

Type of result

Example+Addition

Numerical

Numerical

A+2-

Subtraction

Numerical

Numerical

100-B

*

Multiplication

Numerical

Numerical

A*C/

Division

Numerical

Numerical

B/100

^

Power

Numerical

Numerical

A^5²

SquareNumerical

Numerical

A²

³

Cube

Numerical

Numerical

B³

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

SymbolOperation

Type of operands

Type of result

ExampleSIN

Sine

Numerical

Numerical

SIN(A)COS

CosineNumerical

Numerical

COS(B)

EXP

Exponential function ex

Numerical

Numerical

EXP(A)

LN

Natural logarithm

Numerical

Numerical

LN(B)

LOG

Decadic logarithm

Numerical

Numerical

LOG(A)MAX

Maximum of two values

Numerical

Numerical

MAX(A,B)

MIN

Minimum of two values

Numerical

Numerical

MIN(20,B)

MOD

Division with remainder

Numerical

Numerical

MOD (10.3)

ABS

Absolute value

Numerical

Numerical

ABS(C)NUM

Boolean → numerical conversion

BooleanNumerical

NUM(A)=

EqualsBooleanBoolean

A=B<>

Not equal to

BooleanBoolean

A<>B>

Greater than

Numerical

Boolean

B>5.6<

Less than

Numerical

Boolean

A<C

OR

Disjunction

BooleanBoolean

B OR CAND

Conjunction

BooleanBoolean

A AND BXOR

Exclusive disjunction

BooleanBoolean

B XOR CNOT

Negation

BooleanBoolean

NOT A

Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Mathematical functions/MF1 to 8/Mode = Formula
Function

OptionsInfo

Calculation

Selection
• Off
• On

On/off switch for the function

Factory setting
Off
Source A ... C

Selection
Select source
Factory setting
None

Endress+Hauser

You can use all the sensor inputs, binary andanalog inputs, mathematical functions, limit
switches, time switches, fieldbus signals,
controllers and datasets for measuring range
switching as the source for measured values.

Measured value

Selection
Depends on the source

1.

Choose a maximum of three sources (A, B
and C) for measured values.

A ... CThe current measured
value is displayed2.

For each source, choose the measured
value to be calculated.
 All available signals - depending on
the selected source - are possible
measured values.

3.

Enter the formula.

4.

Switch on the calculation.
 The current measured values A, B
and C as well as the result of thecalculation using the formula aredisplayed.

153

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Mathematical functions/MF1 to 8/Mode = Formula
Function

Options

Info

FormulaUser-defined text

Table →  152
Make sure the exact notation is used (uppercase). Blank spaces before and after
mathematical characters are irrelevant.
Note the operator precedence, i.e.
multiplication and division takeprecedence over addition and subtraction.
Use parentheses if necessary.

Result unit

User-defined text

You may enter a unit for the calculated value if
desired.

Result format

Selection• #• #.#• #.##• #.###• #.####

Select the number of decimal places.

Factory setting#.##
Result numericRead only

Mathematical function
assignment view

Current, calculated value
Overview of the configured functions

Example: 2-point chlorine regulator with volume flow monitoring
A relay output activates a dosing pump. The pump should switch on when the following 3
conditions are met:
• (1) There is flow
• (2) The volume flow is above a defined value• (3) The concentration of chlorine drops below a defined value
1.

Connect a binary input signal from an "INS" point level switch of the CCA250
assembly to the DIO module.

2.

Connect an analog input signal of a volume flow meter to the AI module.

3.

Connect the chlorine sensor.

4.

Configure the Formula mathematical function: Source A = binary input DIO, Source
B = current input AI, Source C = input Disinfection.
 Formula:
A AND (B > 3) AND (C < 0.9)
(where 3 is the lower limit value of the volume flow and 0.9 is the lower limit
value of the chlorine concentration)

5.

Configure the relay output with the Formula mathematical function and connect thedosing pump to the corresponding relay.

The pump is switched on if all 3 conditions are met. If one of the conditions is no longer
met, the pump is switched off again.
 Instead of outputting the result of the formula directly to a relay, you can also connect alimit switch in between in order to attenuate the output signal via a switch-on and switchoff delay.
Example: Load-based control
The load - i.e. the product of the concentration and volume flow - is needed for the dosage
of precipitants, for instance.

154

1.

Connect the input signal of a phosphate analyzer to the AI module.

2.

Connect an analog input signal of a volume flow meter to the AI module.
Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

3.

Configure the Formula mathematical function: Source A = input signal phosphateand Source B = input signal volume flow.
 Formula:
A*B*x(where x is an application-specific proportionality factor)

4.

Select this formula as the source e.g. of the current output or of a modulated binary
output.

5.

Connect the valve or pump.

10.6.6

Measuring range switching

A measuring range switching (MRS) configuration includes the following options for eachof the four binary input states:• Operating mode (conductivity or concentration)• Concentration table• Temperature compensation• Current output turndown• Limit switch range
An MRS set is assigned to a channel and switched on. The measuring range configuration
selected via the binary inputs is now applied instead of the normal configuration of thelinked sensor channel. For current outputs and limit switches to be controlled by the MRS,
they must be linked to the MRS set, not to the measuring channel.
Current outputs and limit switches can be linked to an MRS set. This MRS set gives you themeasured value and the associated turn down (current outputs) or the range for limit
value monitoring (limit switches).
A limit switch connected to an MRS set always uses the Out of range checkmode.
Consequently, it switches when the value is outside the configured range.
If a current output or limit switch is connected to an MRS set, the turndown, monitoring
range and limit switch mode can no longer be configured manually. Therefore, these
options are hidden in the menus (current outputs and limit switch).
Programming example: CIP cleaning in a brewery
Beer

Water

AlkaliAcid

Binary input 1

0

0

1

1

Binary input 1

0

1

0

1

Measuring
range 00

Measuring
range 01

Measuring
range 10

Measuring
range 11

Operating mode

Conductivity

Conductivity

Concentration

Concentration

Conc. table--

NaOH 0..15%

User table 1

Compensation

User table 1

Linear--Range lower value

1.00 mS/cm

0.1 mS/cm

0.50 %

0.50 %

Range upper value

3.00 mS/cm

0.8 mS/cm

5.00 %

1.50 %

Range lower value

2.3 mS/cm

0.5 mS/cm

2.00 %

1.30 %

Range upper value

2.5 mS/cm

0.7 mS/cm

2.10 %

1.40 %

Current output

Limit switches

Endress+Hauser

155

Operation

Liquistation CSF48

Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Measuring range switch
Function

Options

MRS set 1 ... 2

MRS

Info
If you enter both activation codes, you have two
independent parameter sets available formeasuring range switching. The submenus are
the same for both sets.

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the function on or off

Factory setting
Off
Sensor

Selection• None• Connected conductivity
sensors

This function can be used on conductivity
sensors only.

Factory setting
None
Binary input 1 ... 2

Selection• None• Binary inputs• Fieldbus signals• Limit switches

Source of the switching signal, can be selected
for input 1 and 2 in each case

Factory setting
None
Measuring range 00 ...
11
Operating mode

Select the MRSs; a maximum of 4 are possible.
The submenus are identical for each and thus
are displayed only once.
Selection• Conductivity• Concentration• TDS• Resistance
Factory setting
Conductivity

Conc. table
Operating mode =Concentration

Selection• NaOH 0..15%• NaOH 25..50%• HCl 0..20%• HNO3 0..24%• HNO3 24..30%• H2SO4 0.5..27%• H2SO4 93..99%• H3PO4 0..40%• NaCl 0..26%• User table 1 ... 4

Selection depends on the sensor used:• Inductive sensor and conductive four-pin
sensor• Conductivity• Concentration• TDS• Conductive sensor• Conductivity• Resistance• TDS
Concentration tables saved at the factory:• NaOH: 0 to 15%, 0 to 100 °C (32 to 212 °F)• NaOH: 25 to 50%, 2 to 80 °C (36 to 176 °F)• HCl: 0 to 20%, 0 to 65 °C (32 to 149 °F)• HNO3: 0 to 25%, 2 to 80 °C (36 to 176 °F)• H2SO4: 0 to 28%, 0 to 100 °C (32 to 212 °F)• H2SO4: 40 to 80%, 0 to 100 °C (32 to 212 °F)• H2SO4: 93 to 100%, 0 to 100 °C (32 to 212°F)• H3PO4: 0 to 40%, 2 to 80 °C (36 to 176 °F)• NaCl: 0 to 26%, 2 to 80 °C (36 to 176 °F)

Factory setting
NaOH 0..15%
Compensation
Operating mode =Conductivity

Selection• None• Linear• NaCl (IEC 746-3)• Water ISO7888 (20°C)• Water ISO7888 (25°C)• UPW NaCl
• UPW HCl
• User table 1 ... 4

Various methods are available to compensate forthe temperature dependency. Depending on yourprocess, decide which type of compensation you
want to use. Alternatively, you can also selectNone and thus measure uncompensatedconductivity.

Factory setting
Linear156

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Operation

Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Measuring range switch
Function

Options

Info

Depends on the Operating
mode

Units are only queried for Operating mode =Conductivity . The other units are pre-definedand cannot be modified.
• Conductivity
S/m, mS/cm, µS/cm, S/cm, µS/m, mS/m
• Concentration
%
• TDS
ppm
• ResistanceΩcm

Depends on the Operating
mode

Units are only queried for Operating mode =Conductivity . The other units are pre-definedand cannot be modified.
• Conductivity
S/m, mS/cm, µS/cm, S/cm, µS/m, mS/m
• Concentration
%
• TDS
ppm
• ResistanceΩcm

Current output
Range lower unit
Range lower value
Range upper unit
Range upper value

Limit switches
Range lower unit
Range lower value
Range upper unit
Range upper value

Endress+Hauser

157

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Liquistation CSF48

11

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

11.1

General troubleshooting

The sampler continuously monitors its functions itself.
The color of the display background changes to red if a diagnostic message for error
category "F" occurs.
The LED beside the display flashes red if a diagnostic message for error category "M"occurs.

11.1.1

Troubleshooting

A diagnostic message appears on the display , measured values are not plausible, or you
identify a fault.
1.

See the Diagnostics menu for details on the diagnostic message.
 Follow the instructions to rectify the problem.

2.

If this does not help, search for the diagnostic message under "Overview of diagnostic
information" in these Operating Instructions. Use the message number as a search
criterion. Ignore the letters indicating the Namur error category.
 Follow the troubleshooting instructions provided in the last column of the error
tables.

3.

If the measured values are implausible, the local display is faulty or you encounter
other problems, search for the faults under "Process errors without messages" (→Operating Instructions Memosens, BA01245C) or "Device-specific errors" (→  162).
 Follow the recommended measures.

4.

Contact the Service Department if you cannot rectify the error yourself. citing only
the error number.

11.1.2

Process errors without messages

Operating Instructions "Memosens", BA01245C

11.1.3

Device-specific errors

ProblemPossible cause

Tests and/or remedial measures

Dark display

No supply voltage‣ Check if supply voltage applied.

Base module defective‣ Replace base module

Values appear on display but:
• Display does not change
and/or• Device cannot be operated

Module not wired
correctly‣ Check modules and wiring.

Impermissible operating
system condition‣ Switch off device and switch it on again.

Implausible measured values

Inputs defective‣ First perform tests and take measures as

outlined in "Process-specific errors" section.

Measuring input test:‣ Connect the Memocheck Sim CYP03D to the
input and use it to check the function of the
input.
Controller signals not
accepted or outputs do notswitch158

Incorrect program setting‣ Check program setting

Incorrect wiring‣ Check wiring

Electronics failure‣ Replace base module

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

ProblemPossible cause

Tests and/or remedial measures

Sample not representative

Siphon in sampling hose

‣ Check the sampling hose

Connection not tight/
sampling hose drawing inair

1.

Check hoses/connections

2.

Check routing of the sampling hose

Bottles not filling correctly Incorrect distribution selected in operation‣ Calibrate the distribution arm
Distribution arm stops

Incorrect distribution selected in operation
1.

Check configured bottle distribution

2.

Check the distribution arm connection

3.

Distributor is defective, replace distributoror have repaired by Endress+Hauser Service

Incorrect bottle filled

Incorrect distribution selected in operation

No sample cooling‣ Check the setting for the sample compartment
temperature at the console

Refrigeration system defective --> have repaired
by Endress+Hauser Service

No sampling

Current output, incorrect
current value

Incorrect pump tubing‣ Only use the original pump tubing

Sensory mechanism isfaulty‣ Replace sensory mechanism (contact Endress

Connection not tight‣ Check tightness of hoses/connections

Sampling hose drawing in
air‣ Check routing of the sampling hose

Air Manager defective

Have repaired by Endress+Hauser Service

Vacuum pump defective

Have repaired by Endress+Hauser Service

Incorrect pump tubing‣ Only use the original pump tubing

Sensory mechanism isfaulty‣ Replace sensory mechanism (contact Endress

Incorrect adjustment‣ Check with integrated current simulation,

Load too large+Hauser Service)+Hauser Service)connect mA meter directly to current output.

Shunt/short to ground incurrent loop
No current output signal

Base module defective‣ Check with integrated current simulation,connect mA meter directly to current output.

11.2

Diagnostic information on local display

Up-to-date diagnostic events are displayed along with their status category, diagnostic
code and short text. Clicking on the navigator lets you retrieve more information and tips
on remedial measures.

11.3

Diagnostic information via web browser

The same diagnostic information that is available for the local display is available via theweb server.

11.4

Diagnostic information via fieldbus

Diagnostic events, status signals and more information are transmitted according to thedefinitions and technical capability of the respective fieldbus systems.

Endress+Hauser

159

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Liquistation CSF48

11.5

Adapting the diagnostic information

11.5.1

Classification of diagnostic messages

In the DIAG/Diagnostics list menu you can find more detailed information on the current
diagnostic messages displayed.
In accordance with Namur specification NE 107, the diagnostic messages are characterizedby:• Message number• Error category (letter in front of the message number)• F = (Failure) a malfunction has been detected
The cause of the malfunction is to be found in the sampling point/measuring point.
Any controller connected should be set to manual mode.
• C = (Function check), (no error)
Maintenance work is being performed on the device. Wait until the work has been
completed.
• S = (Out of specification), the measuring point is being operated outside its
specification
Operation is still possible. However, you run the risk of increased wear, a shorter
operating life or lower accuracy levels. The cause of the problem is to be found outside
the measuring point.
• M = Maintenance required. Action must be taken as soon as possible.
The device still measures/takes samples correctly. Immediate measures are notnecessary. However, proper maintenance efforts would prevent a possible malfunctionin the future.
• Message text
If you contact the Service Department, please cite the message number only. Since you
can individually change the assignment of an error to an error category, the Service
Department cannot use this information.

11.5.2

Adapting the diagnostic behavior

All the diagnostic messages are assigned to specific error categories at the factory. Sinceother settings might be preferred depending on the application, error categories and theeffect errors have on the measuring point can be configured individually. Furthermore,
every diagnostic message can be disabled.
ExampleDiagnostic message 531 Logbook fullappears on the display. You want to change thismessage so that an error is not shown on the display for example.
1.

Select the diagnostics message and press the navigator button.

2.

Decide: (a) Should the message be deactivated? (Diagnostics message = Off)(b) Do you want to change the error category?(Status signal)(c) Should an error current be output? (Failure current = On)(d) Do you want to trigger a cleaning program? (Cleaning program)

3.

Example: You deactivate the message.
 The message is no longer displayed. In the DIAG menu, the message appears as
Past message.

Possible settings
The list of diagnostic messages displayed depends on the path selected. There are devicespecific messages, and messages that depend on what sensor is connected.

160

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Menu/Setup/Run the ../Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag. behavior
Function

OptionsInfo‣ Select the message to be changed.

List of diagnostic messages

Only then can you make the settings for thismessage.
Diag. code

Read only

Diagnostic message

Selection
• Off
• On
Factory setting
Depends on the
Diag. code

Failure current

Selection
• Off
• On
Factory setting
Depends on the
Diag. code

Status signal

Selection• Maintenance (M)• Out of specification (S)• Function check (C)• Failure (F)You can deactivate or reactivate a diagnostic
message here.
Deactivating means:• No error message in the measuring mode
• No error current at the current output
Decide whether an error current should be
output at the current output if the diagnostic
message display is activated.
In the event of general device errors, the error
current is switched to all the current outputs. In
the event of channel-specific errors, the error
current is only switched to the current output inquestion.
The messages are divided into different error
categories in accordance with NAMUR NE 107.
Decide whether you want to change a status
signal assignment for your application.

Factory setting
Depends on the
Diag. code
Diag. output

Selection• None• Binary outputs• Alarm relay• Relay
Factory setting
None

Cleaning program

Selection• None• Cleaning 1 ... 4
Factory setting
None

Detail information

Endress+Hauser

Read only

You can use this function to select a relay output
and/or binary output to which the diagnostic
message should be assigned.
An alarm relay is always available,
 regardlessof the device version. Other
relays are optional.
Before you can assign the message to an output:
Configure one of the output types mentioned asfollows:
Menu/Setup/Outputs/(Alarm relay or Binary
output or relay)/Function = Diagnostics andOperating mode = as assigned.
Decide whether the diagnostic message should
trigger a cleaning program.
You can define cleaning programs under:
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning.
Here you can find more information on the
diagnostic message and instructions on how toresolve the problem.

161

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Liquistation CSF48

11.6

Overview of diagnostic information

11.6.1

Device-specific, general diagnostic messages

No.

Message

Factory settings
S

1)

D

2)

Tests or remedial action
F

3)

202

Selftest active

F

On

Off

Wait for self-test to be finished

216

Hold active

C

On

Off

Output values and status of the channel are on
hold

241

Firmware failure

F

On

On

Internal device error

242

Firmware incomp.

F

On

On

1.

Update the software.

On

2.

Contact Endress+Hauser Service.

3.

Replace the backplane (Endress+Hauser
Service).

243

261

262

263

Firmware failure

Electronics module

Module connection

Incomp. detected

F

F

F

F

On

On

On

On

On

On

On

Electronics module defective
1.

Replace the module.

2.

Contact Endress+Hauser Service.

Electronics module not communicating
1.

Check the cable connection , replace it ifnecessary.

2.

Check the power supply of the sampling
control module.

3.

Contact Endress+Hauser Service.

Wrong kind of electronics module1.

Replace the module.

2.

Contact Endress+Hauser Service.

284

Firmware update

M

On

Off

Update completed successfully

285

Update error

F

On

On

Firmware update failed

302

Battery low

M

On

Off

1.

Repeat.

2.

SD card error → use another card.

3.

Incorrect firmware → repeat with suitable
firmware.

4.

Contact Endress+Hauser Service.

Buffer battery of real time clock is low
The date and time are lost if the power isinterrupted.

‣ Contact Endress+Hauser Service (battery
replacement).

304

305

306

Module data

Power consumption

Software error

F

F

F

On

On

On

On

On

On

At least 1 module has incorrect configuration data
1.

Check the system information.

2.

Contact Endress+Hauser Service.

Total power consumption too high1.

Check installation.

2.

Remove sensors/modules.

Internal firmware error‣ Contact Endress+Hauser Service.

162

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Diagnostics and troubleshootingNo.

Message

Factory settings
S

310

Temperature sensor

1)

F

D

2)

On

Tests or remedial action
F

3)

On

Temperature sensor PT1 in the climate control
module for sample compartment measurement is
defective• No temperature regulation possible for the
sample compartment• Unable to cancel the sampling program‣ Contact Endress+Hauser Service.
311

Temperature sensor

F

On

On

Temperature sensor PT2 in the sample
compartment is defective• No sample temperature measurement possible• An in-progress sampling program cannot becanceled‣ Replace the sensor.
312

313

314

315

316

317

Temperature sensor

Safety sensor

No sample flow

Refrigeration

Heating

Liquidsensor

F

M

F

F

F

M

On

On

On

On

On

On

On

On

On

On

On

On

Temperature sensor PT3 for ambient temperature
measurement is defective• Winter operation regulation not possible• Sampling and distribution arm blocked toprotect against freezing
1.

Deactivate winter operation under Setup/
Inputs/Temperature S:3/Winteroperation.

2.

Replace the sensor.

Safety switch LF2 for sample sensor active• Contact electrodes for sample detection arefouled• The sample continues to be taken
1.

Clean sample detection sensor LF1 in thedosing glass.

2.

Contact Endress+Hauser Service.

A vacuum cannot be generated in the peristaltic
pump.
1.

Check the pump tube for leaks.

2.

Immerse the suction line in the medium.

• Sample compartment target temperature notreached• Cooling regulation not possible
1.

Check the sample compartment door.

2.

Perform the module test under Menu/
Diagnostics/System test/Cooling system/
Check cooling.

3.

Contact Endress+Hauser Service.

• Sample compartment target temperature notreached• Heating regulation not possible
1.

Check the sample compartment door.

2.

Perform the module test under Menu/
Diagnostics/System test/Cooling system/
Check heating.

3.

Contact Endress+Hauser Service.

• Sensor LF1 for sample detection fouled• Five samples still possible‣ Clean sensor LF1 in the dosing glass.
318

Liquidsensor

F

On

On

• Sensor LF1 for sample detection defective• No sampling possible‣ Contact Endress+Hauser Service.

Endress+Hauser

163

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

No.

Liquistation CSF48

Message

Factory settings
S319

Safety sensor

1)

M

D

2)

On

Tests or remedial action
F

3)

On

• Safety switch LF2 fouled• Five samples still possible‣ Clean sensor LF2 in the dosing glass.
320

Safety sensor

F

On

On

• Safety switch LF2 defective• No sampling possible‣ Contact Endress+Hauser Service.
321

322

Liquid sensor

Read sub-program

F

F

On

On

On

On

Capacitance sensor adjusted incorrectly or
defective• No medium detection possible in the dosing
glass• No sampling possible
1.

Clean sensor.

2.

Contact Endress+Hauser Service.

Selected subprogram cannot be read from theprogram memory‣ Create a new subprogram.
323

324

Write sub-program

Delete sub-program

F

F

On

On

On

On

Subprogram created cannot be saved1.

Hardware error

2.

Contact Endress+Hauser Service.

Selected subprogram cannot be deleted from theprogram memory‣ Perform a software reset.
325

Read subprogram list

F

On

On

Subprogram list cannot be read from the program
memory‣ Perform a software reset.
326

Membrane pump

F

On

On

• Vacuum pump defective• Motor cable broken‣ Contact Endress+Hauser Service.
327

Air-Manager

F

On

On

• Air Manager for compressed air distribution
system defective• Photoelectric barrier defective• Cable defective‣ Contact Endress+Hauser Service.
328

329

Distribution arm

Pump failure

F

F

On

On

On

On

Distribution arm zero point not found duringreference run
1.

Perform the distribution arm test underMenu/Diagnostics/System test/
Distribution arm.

2.

Contact Endress+Hauser Service.

Pump motor is drawing excess current‣ Contact Endress+Hauser Service.
330

Membrane pump

F

On

On

Vacuum pump control defective‣ Contact Endress+Hauser Service.
331

Peristaltic pump

F

On

On

• Peristaltic pump defective• Motor cable broken‣ Contact Endress+Hauser Service.
332

Peristaltic pump

F

On

On

Control of peristaltic pump defective‣ Contact Endress+Hauser Service.

164

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Diagnostics and troubleshootingNo.

Message

Factory settings
S

333

334

335

337

338

339

340

Pressure sensor

Cooling system

Fan defective

Pump hose warning

Pump hose alarm

Liquidsensor

Liquidsensor

1)

F

F

F

M

M

M

M

D

2)

On

On

On

On

On

On

On

Tests or remedial action
F

3)

On

On

On

Off

Off

Off

Off

Medium detection not possible, sampling notpossible• Suction line not drained before sampling• Pressure sensor defective
1.

Check the suction line, if necessary use thepump test under Menu/Diagnostics/
System test/Pump purge.

2.

Contact Endress+Hauser Service.

Climate control module defective
1.

Replace the climate control module.

2.

Contact Endress+Hauser Service.

Fan defective
1.

Replace the fan.

2.

Contact Endress+Hauser Service.

End of pump tube service life will be reachedshortly
Display under Menu/Diagnostics/Operatingtime information/Pump tube life
1.

Schedule replacement.

2.

After replacing, reset the operating time
under Menu/Diagnostics/Operating time
information.

End of pump tube service life reached
Display under Menu/Diagnostics/Operatingtime information/Pump tube life.
1.

Replace the pump tube.

2.

After replacing, reset the operating time
under Menu/Diagnostics/Operating time
information.

Sensor LF1 fouled
1.

Clean the sensor soon.

2.

Set the sensitivity under: Setup/General
settings/Sampling/Conductive sensor.

Sensor LF1 fouled
1.

Clean sensor.

2.

Set the sensitivity under: Setup/General
settings/Sampling/Conductive sensor.

343

Power supply

M

On

Off

Power supply failure

344

Program pause

C

On

Off

Sampling program paused

345

Time changeover

M

On

Off

Daylight saving time/winter time setting
Normal time (winter time) active

346

Time changeover

M

On

Off

Daylight saving time/winter time setting
Daylight saving time active347

No sample confirm.

F

On

On

Sampling command has not been processed

348

Read program

F

On

On

1.

Check the internal cable to 1IF.

2.

Perform a software reset.

Selected program cannot be read from theprogram memory‣ Create a new program.

Endress+Hauser

165

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

No.

Liquistation CSF48

Message

Factory settings
S

349

Read program

1)

F

D

2)

On

Tests or remedial action
F

3)

On

Program created cannot be saved
Hardware error has occurred‣ Contact Endress+Hauser Service.
351

Delete program

F

On

On

Selected program cannot be deleted from theprogram memory‣ Perform a software reset.
352

Read Programlist

F

On

On

Program list cannot be read from the program
memory‣ Reset the device: Menu/Diagnostics/Device
restart353

Overfill check

F

On

Off

Total capacity of bottle reachedNo further sampling to current bottle is triggered‣ If desired: Make changes to the sampling

program under Select sampling program.

354

Bottle check

F

On

Off

No empty bottles available for current program
No further sampling‣ Check program settings under Selectsampling program.

355

Start time over

M

On

Off

Start time entered is in the past

‣ Enter a new start time.
356

Overfill check

F

On

Off

The total sample volume does not fit in thesample bottle‣ Change the sample volume.
357

Sampling faulted

M

On

Off

• Sample discarded• There are too many sampling requests pending‣ Make changes to the sampling program underSelect sampling program.

358

Configuration

F

On

On

Program configuration does not match the current
device configuration‣ Adjust the configuration.
359

370

373

Emptying error

Internal voltage

Electronictemp. high

F

F

M

On

On

On

On

On

Off

• Error during emptying• Emptying and sampling program is canceled
1.

Check the connection to the FMSY1
module.

2.

Check the 4R module, replace it ifnecessary.

3.

Reset the device: Menu/Diagnostics/
Device restartInternal voltage outside the valid range
1.

Check supply voltage.

2.

Check inputs and outputs for shortcircuiting.

High electronics temperature‣ Check ambient temperature and energy
consumption.

374

166

Sensor check

F

On

Off

No measurement signal from sensor
1.

Check sensor connection.

2.

Check the sensor, replace it if necessary.

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Diagnostics and troubleshootingNo.

Message

Factory settings
S375

No 4R module

1)

F

D

2)

On

Tests or remedial action
F

3)

On

No connection to the 4R module
1.

Check the 4R module, replace it ifnecessary.

2.

Restart the software under: Menu/
Diagnostics/Device restart.

401

Factory reset

F

On

On

Factory reset is performed

403

Device verification

M

Off

Off

Device verification active, please wait

405

Service IP active

C

Off

Off

Endress+Hauser Service switch is switched on
The device can be addressed at 192.168.1.212.

‣ Switch off the service switch to change to the
saved IP settings.

412

Writing backup

F

On

Off

‣ Wait for the write process to be finished

413

Reading backup

F

On

Off

‣ Wait.

455

Mathemat. function

F

On

On

Mathematical function: fault condition

460

Output below limit

S

On

Off

461

Output above limit

S

On

Off

1.

Check mathematical function.

2.

Check assigned input variables.

Reasons• Sensor in air• Air pockets in assembly• Sensor fouled• Incorrect flow to sensor
1.

Check sensor installation.

2.

Clean sensor.

3.

Change assignment of current outputs.

502

No text catalog

F

On

On

‣ Contact Endress+Hauser Service.

503

Language change

M

On

Off

Language change failed‣ Contact Endress+Hauser Service.
529

Diag. setup active

C

Off

Off

‣ Wait for maintenance to be finished.

530

Logbook at 80%

M

On

Off

1.

531

Logbook full

M

On

Off

Save the logbook to the SD card and thendelete the logbook in the device.

2.

Set memory to circular buffer.

3.

Deactivate logbook.

532

License error

M

On

Off

‣ Contact Endress+Hauser Service.

536

SD card (80%)

M

On

Off

SD card 80% full

537

538

Endress+Hauser

SD card (100%)

SD card removed

M

M

On

On

Off

Off

1.

Replace SD card with empty card.

2.

Clear SD card.

3.

Set logbook properties to ring buffer under
Logbooks.

SD card 100% full. No longer possible to write to
the card.
1.

Replace SD card with empty card.

2.

Clear SD card.

3.

Set logbook properties to ring buffer under
Logbooks.

SD card not plugged in1.

Check SD card.

2.

Replace SD card.

3.

Disable logging.

167

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

No.

Liquistation CSF48

Message

Factory settings
S

540

Parameter save fail

1)

M

D

2)

On

Tests or remedial action
F

3)

Off

Storage of configuration has failed‣ Repeat.
541

Parameter load ok

M

On

Off

542

Parameter load fail

M

On

Off

Configuration successfully loaded
Loading of configuration has failed‣ Repeat.
543

Parameter load abort

M

On

Off

Configuration loading aborted

544

Parameter reset ok

M

On

Off

Factory default successful

545

Parameter reset fail

M

On

Off

Setting of device configuration to factory setting
has failed

903

Minimum flow

F

On

On

The flow is too low for flow-proportional sampling1.

Check the medium flow.

2.

Check the flowmeter.

3.

Check the configuration under Setup/
Inputs/Current input S:x.

4.
910

Limit switch

S

On

Off

Limit switch activated920

No sample

F

On

On

No inflow during dosing process• Suction line blocked or leaking• No inflow of sample

921

922

923

168

Pump bracket open

Armature cycle

Armature cycle

F

M

M

On

On

On

On

Off

On

1.

Check suction line and suction strainer

2.

Check inflow of sample.

The pump bracket is detected as open
• Pump bracket open
• Reed contact defective
1.

Close the pump bracket.

2.

Contact Endress+Hauser Service.

O-ring seals on sampling assembly approachingend of operating life
Display under Diagnostics/Operating time
information/Inline armature
1.

Replace the seals.

2.

Switch off monitoring under Setup/
General settings/Sampling/Diagnostics
settings/Process sealing.

3.

Contact Endress+Hauser Service

O-ring seals on sampling assembly have reached
end of operating life
Display under Diagnostics/Operating time
information/Inline armature
1.

Replace the seals.

2.

Switch off monitoring under Setup/
General settings/Sampling/Diagnostics
settings/Process sealing.

3.

Contact Endress+Hauser Service.

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Diagnostics and troubleshootingNo.

Message

Factory settings
S

924

925

Inline armature

Inline armature

F

F

1)

D

2)

On

On

Tests or remedial action
F

3)

On

On

Final sampling position (in the process) of
sampling assembly not reached or detected• Final position switch is damaged• Supply cables are damaged
1.

Check the final position switches.

2.

Check the supply cables to the final position
switches.

3.

Contact Endress+Hauser Service.

Final sampling position (in the process) of
sampling assembly not reached or detected• Assembly blocked• Final position switch is damaged• Supply cables are damaged
1.

926

927

928

929

Inline armature

Winter operation

No sample

Input signal

F

S

F

F

On

On

On

On

On

Off

On

On

Check the assembly.

2.

Check the final position switches.

3.

Check the supply cables to the final position
switches.

4.

Contact Endress+Hauser Service.

Final dosing position (outside the process) of
sampling assembly not reached or detected• Assembly blocked• Final position switch is damaged• Supply cables are damaged
1.

Check the assembly2.

Check the final position switches.

3.

Check the supply cables to the final position
switches.

4.

Contact Endress+Hauser Service.

1.

Winter operation active2.

Outside temperature too low

3.

No sampling

Sample intake not possible• Suction line clogged• Suction height too high1.

Check the suction line and suction strainer.

2.

Ensure suitable suction height (< 8 m).

• Sensors reversed• Sensor not present‣ Check measuring inputs.
930

937

No sample

Controlled variable

F

S

On

On

On

Off

Sample flow interrupted during intake• Suction line blocked or leaking• No inflow of sample
1.

Check the suction line and suction strainer.

2.

Check inflow of sample.

Controller input warning
Status of the controller variable is not OK‣ Check application.
938

Controller setpoint

S

On

Off

Controller input warning
Status of set point is not OK‣ Check application.

Endress+Hauser

169

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

No.

Liquistation CSF48

Message

Factory settings
S

939

Control. disturbance

S

1)

D

2)

On

Tests or remedial action
F

3)

Off

Controller input warning
Status of disturbance variable is not OK‣ Check application.
951 - Hold active CH1 ..
958

C

On

Off

Output values and status of the channels are on
hold.

‣ Wait until the hold is deactivated again.
961 - Diagnostic module 1
968 (961)...
Diagnostic module 8
(968)

S

Off

Off

Diagnostic module is enabled969

Modbus Watchdog

S

Off

Off

The device did not receive a Modbus telegram
from the master within the specified time. The
status of Modbus process values received is set toinvalid970

Curr. input overload

S

On

On

Current input overloaded
The current input is switched off from 23 mA due
to overload and reactivated automatically when anormal load is present.

971

Current Input low

S

On

On

Current input too low
At 4 to 20 mA, the input current is less than thelower failure current.

‣ Check the input for short-circuiting.
972

Curr. input > 20 mA

S

On

On

Current output range exceeded

973

Current Input < 4 mA

S

On

On

Current output range undershot

974

Diagnostics confirm.

C

Off

Off

User has acknowledged the message displayed in
the measuring menu.

975

Device restart

C

Off

Off

Device reset

978

ChemoClean Failsafe

S

On

On

No feedback signal detected within the configured
period.
1.

Check application.

2.

Check wiring.

3.

Extend the duration.

990

Deviation limit

F

On

On

Redundancy: limit value of percentage deviation
exceeded991

CO2 conc. range

F

On

On

CO2 concentration (degassed conductivity) outside
the measuring range992

pH calculation range

F

On

On

pH calculation outside the measuring range993

rH calculation range

F

On

On

rH calculation outside the measuring range

994

Difference conduct.

F

On

On

Dual conductivity outside the measuring range

1)
2)
3)

Status signal
Diagnostic message
Failure current

11.6.2

Sensor-specific diagnostic messages

Operating Instructions "Memosens", BA01245C

170

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

11.7

Pending diagnostic messages

The Diagnostics menu contains all the information on the device status.
Furthermore, various service functions are available.
The following messages are directly displayed every time you enter the menu:• Most important message
Diagnostic message recorded with the highest criticality level• Past message
Diagnostic message whose cause is no longer present.
All the other functions in the Diagnostics menu are described in the following chapters.
Diagnostic messages associated with sampling are deleted under the following conditions:• Diagnostic messages caused by sampling are deleted automatically with the next
successful sampling.
• Diagnostic messages caused by the level of medium in the bottle are deleted the nexttime the bottle is changed.
If the diagnostic message "M313 liquid sensor" appears 5 times in succession when
executing a program, the active program is aborted for reasons of safety.
This device behavior cannot be altered by deactivating the diagnostic message underMenu/Setup/General settings/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings.

11.8

Diagnostics list

All the current diagnostic messages are listed here.
A time stamp is available for each message. Furthermore, the user also sees theconfiguration and description of the message as saved in Menu/Setup/General settings/
Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag. behavior .

11.9

Event logbook

11.9.1

Available logbooks

Types of logbooks• Logbooks physically available (all apart from the overall logbook)• Database view of all logbooks (= overall logbook)
LogbookEndress+Hauser

Visible inMax.
entriesCan bedisabled 1

Logbook
can bedeletedEntriescan bedeletedCan beexported)

Overall logbook

All events

20000

Yes

No

Yes

No

Calibration logbook

Calibration events

75

(Yes)

No

Yes

Yes

Operation logbook

Configuration events

250

(Yes)

No

Yes

Yes

Diagnostics logbook

Diagnostic events

250

(Yes)

No

Yes

Yes

Program logbook

Program logbook

5000

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Version logbook

All events

50

No

No

No

Yes

Hardware version
logbookAll events

125

No

No

No

Yes

171

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Liquistation CSF48

Logbook

Visible inMax.
entries

Data logbook for
sensors (optional)

Data logbooks

Debugging logbook

Debug events
1000(only accessible byentering the special
service activation code)1)

150 000

Can bedisabled 1

Logbook
can bedeletedEntriescan bedeletedCan beexported

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

)

Data in brackets means this depends on the overall logbook

11.9.2

Logbooks menu

DIAG/Logbooks
Function

Options

All events

Info
Chronological list of all the logbook entries, withinformation on the type of event

Show

Events are displayed

Select a particular event to display more detailed
information.

Go to date

User entry• Go to date
• TimeUse this function to go directly to a specific timein the list. In this way, you avoid having to scroll
through all the information. The complete list isalways visible, however.

Calibration events

Chronological list of the calibration eventsShow

Events are displayed

Select a particular event to display more detailed
information.

Go to date

User entry• Go to date
• TimeUse this function to go directly to a specific timein the list. In this way, you avoid having to scroll
through all the information. The complete list isalways visible, however.

Delete all entries

ActionYou can delete all the calibration logbook entries
here.

Configuration events

Chronological list of the configuration eventsShow

Events are displayed

Select a particular event to display more detailed
information.

Go to date

User entry• Go to date
• TimeUse this function to go directly to a specific timein the list. In this way, you avoid having to scroll
through all the information. The complete list isalways visible, however.

Delete all entries

ActionYou can use this to delete all the operation
logbook entries.

Diagnostic events

Chronological list of the diagnostics eventsShow

Events are displayed

Select a particular event to display more detailed
information.

Go to date

User entry• Go to date
• TimeUse this function to go directly to a specific timein the list. In this way, you avoid having to scroll
through all the information. The complete list isalways visible, however.

Delete all entries

ActionYou can use this to delete all the diagnostics
logbook entries.

You can also view your data logbook entries graphically on the display (Show plot).

172

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

You can also adapt the display to suit your individual requirements:• Press the navigator button in the graphic display: you are given additional options suchas the zoom function and x/y movement of the graph.
• Define the cursor: if you select this option, you can move along the graph with thenavigator and view the logbook entry (data stamp/measured value) in text form forevery point in the graph.
• Simultaneous display of two logbooks: Select 2nd plot and Show plot
• A small cross marks the currently selected graph for which the zoom can be changed
or a cursor used, for example.
• In the context menu (press the navigator button), you can select the other graph. You
can then apply the zoom function, a movement or a cursor to this graph.
• Using the context menu, you can also select both graphs simultaneously. This enables
you to use the zoom function on both graphs simultaneously, for example.
126.00nA

34.00
nA
09.11.2011
14:02:20

23.11.2011
11:25:32

09.11.2011
14:02:20

23.11.2011
11:25:32

12.00
pH

6.00
pH

A0016688

 80

Simultaneous display of two graphs, the top one is selected

DIAG/Logbooks
Function

Options

Data logbooks

Info
Chronological list of the data logbook entries forsensors

Data logbook 1 ... 8<Logbook name>

This submenu is available for each data logbookthat you have set up and activated.

Source of data

Read only

Input or mathematical function is displayed

Measured value

Read only

Measured value being recorded is displayed

Log time left

Read only

Display of days, hours and minutes until logbook
is full.

‣ Pay attention to the information on

selecting the memory type in the menu
General settings/Logbooks.

Endress+Hauser

Show

Events are displayed

Select a particular event to display more detailed
information.

Go to date

User entry• Go to date
• TimeUse this function to go directly to a specific timein the list. In this way, you avoid having to scroll
through all the information. The complete list isalways visible, however.

Show plot

Graphic display of thelogbook entries

The display is according to your settings in themenu General settings/Logbooks.

Select 2nd plot

Select another datalogbookYou can view a second logbook at the same timeas the current one.

173

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Liquistation CSF48

DIAG/Logbooks
Function
Delete all entries

Options

Info

ActionYou can use this to delete all data logbook
entries.

Selection
• CSV
• FDM

‣ Save the logbook in the preferred file

Save logbooks
File format

Program logbook
All data logbooks
Data logbook 1 ... 8
All event logbooks
Calibration logbook
Diagnostic logbook
Configuration logbook
HW version logbook
Version logbook

Action,commences as soon as theoption is selected

format.

You can then open the saved CSV file on the PC
in MS Excel, for example, and make further edits
here. 1). You can import the FDM files into
FieldCare and archive them so that they aretamper-proof.
Use this function to save the logbook to an SD
card.

‣ Insert the SD card into the device card reader
and select the logbook to be saved.

‣ Save the logbook in the preferred fileformat. You can then open the saved CSV
file on the PC in MS-Excel, for example, andedit it. You can import the FDM files into
Fieldcare and archive them so they aretamper-proof.

file name is made up of the Logbook ident (Menu/Setup/General settings/Logbooks), an Theabbreviation for the particular logbook and a time stamp.
1)

CSV files use international number formats and separators. Therefore they must be imported into MS
Excel as external data with the correct format settings. If you double-click the file to open it, the data are
only displayed correctly if MS Excel is installed with the US country setting.

11.9.3

Program logbook

Entry

ExampleInfo

Timestamp

05.05.2010 12:40

Time stamp - the start time in the case ofsampling

Event

BasicPrgStart

Power on--> Time the device is started
Power failure--> Time the power failed (to the minute)
BasicPrgStart, StdPrgStart--> Time the program was started
BasicSampling, StdSampling--> Entry made during sampling
PrgPartStart, PrgPartStop--> Time a subprogram is enabled anddisabled
PrgStop--> Time the program was ended

Name

Program1

In the case of BasicPrgStart, StdPrgStart,
BasicSampling or PrgStop--> The name of the program appears
In the case of StdSampling, PrgPartStart
or PrgPartStop--> The name of the subprogram appears

174

Bottle configuration

12x+6x - PE/glass plate
distribution

The selected bottle configuration isdisplayed

Left bottle volume

1000

Right bottle volume

3000

The bottle volume is displayed--> "Right bottle volume" remains empty forbottle configurations with different volumes

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Entry

ExampleInfo

Sampling mode

Time-paced CTCV

Time-paced CTCV
Time-paced
Flow-paced VTCV
Flow-paced
Time/flow-paced CTVV
Time/flow-paced
Single sample
Single sample
Sample table
Single sample
Sampling mode
Display of the sampling mode

Sampling interval/unit

10 min

Display of the interval and the unit

Samples/bottle

4With bottle change
Number of samples per bottle.

Bottles/sample

0

Multiple bottles,

Sampling volume/unit

100 mlSample volume when sampling

Start mode

Immediate

Field only populated for PrgPartStart,
BasicPrgStart and StdPrgStart:--> The program start setting is displayed• Immediate --> immediately• Date/time --> after date/time• Volume --> with a volume• Event --> when an event occurs• Interval --> after an interval• Individual dates --> individual timetable• Multiple date --> multiple dates

Endress+Hauser

Start date

05.05.2010

Field only populated if Start mode = Date/Time:--> The start date is displayed

Stop mode

Program end

The program stop setting is displayed:• Program end --> when the program ends
• Continuous --> continuous operation• Bottles full --> when bottles are full
• Date/time --> after date/time• Event --> when an event occurs

Stop date

06.05.2010

Field only populated if Program end =Date/Time:--> The date the program was stopped isdisplayed

Start flow sum/unit

100 m3

Field only populated if Start mode =Volume:--> The starting volume is displayed

Bottle number

1

Field only populated for BasicSampling or
StdSampling:--> The bottle which was filled with thesample is displayed

Sample nbr

2

Number of samples transferred to thecurrent bottle

Sampling result

Sampling Ok

Sampling Ok --> sampling ok
Sampling nOk --> sampling failed--> For detailed diagnostics messages, see
the diagnostics logbook

175

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Liquistation CSF48

Entry

ExampleInfo

Running sample number

1

Running sample number in the current
programFlow sum since last sampling1

For flow-paced and time/flow-paced
sampling:--> Flow since the last sampling
For all other types of sampling:--> Display: 0

11.9.4

Bottle statistics

Display shows the bottle statistics of the sampler:‣ In Menu/Diagnostics/Logbooks/Logbook program select the Show summary of

current program item or select the MEAS soft key; works both when the program is
active and when it has stopped.
 The statistics appears for each individual bottle when the program is started. This
gives you detailed feedback on the last sampling operations.
The statistics are deleted when the following event occurs:
Program start
The statistics are selectively overwritten when the following event occurs:
When the first bottle is reached in situations where "Continuous operation" isconfigured as the end of the program in the program settings

The statistics are displayed as follows:

A0045690

176

DisplayInfobt

The bottle number is displayed.

hh:mm

The time the first sample was transferred to the bottle is displayed.

DD-hh:mm

The time the first sample was transferred to the bottle is displayed.

Smp

Displays how often sampling was triggered per bottle.

n.sIndicates the number of times a sample was not taken even though sampling was
triggered. This can occur if the maximum permissible fill volume for the bottle has
been reached but the system is still supposed to transfer samples to the bottle. The"Overfill sensor" message is displayed while the program is active.

n.f

The value indicates how often sampling was canceled because it was not possible todraw in any or enough medium into the dosing glass to cover the LF1 probe.

ml

The sampling volume collected per bottle is displayed.

Q

The total flow for every bottle is displayed (only if flow measurement is connected).

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

11.10 Device information
11.10.1 System information
DIAG/System information
Function

Options

Info

Device tag

Read only

Individual device tag → General
settings

Order code

Read only

You can order identical hardware
with this code.
This code changes on account ofchanges to the hardware and you
can enter the new code you received
from the manufacturer here 1).

To establish the version of your device, enter the order code into the search screen at the following
 address:www.endress.com/order-ident
Orig. order code ext.

Read only

Complete order code for the original
device, resulting from the productstructure.

Current order code ext.

Read only

Current code, taking into accountchanges to the hardware. You mustenter this code yourself.

Serial number

Read only

The serial number allows you toaccess device data anddocumentation on the Internet:
www.endress.com/device-viewer

Software version

Read only

Current version

Sw version FMSY1

Read only

Current version

FMSY1 proj. version

Read only

Current version

Read only• Bus address• Unique address• Manufacturer ID• Device type
• Device revision• Software revision

HART‐specific information
The unique address is linked to theserial number and is used to accessdevices in a Multidrop environment.
Device and software version
numbers are incremented as soon aschanges have been made.

Read only• Enable• Bus address• Termination• Modbus TCP Port 502

Modbus‐specific information

Read only• Termination• Bus address• Ident number• Baudrate• DPV0 state• DPV0 fault• DPV0 master addr
• DPV0 WDT [ms]Module status and other PROFIBUSspecific information

HART
Only with the HART option

ModbusOnly with the Modbus option

PROFIBUS
Only with the PROFIBUS option

Endress+Hauser

177

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Liquistation CSF48

DIAG/System information
Function
Ethernet
Only with the Ethernet, EtherNet/IP,
Modbus TCP, Modbus RS485 or PROFIBUS
DP or PROFINET option

Options

Info

Read only• Enable• Webserver• Link settings• DHCP• IP-Address• Netmask• Gateway• Service switch• MAC-Address• EtherNetIP Port 44818• Modbus TCP Port 502• Webserver TCP port 80

Ethernet‐specific information
Display depends on the fieldbus
protocol used.

PROFINET
Only with the PROFINET option
Name of station
SD cardRead only
Read only• Total• Free memory

System modules
Backplane
Base
Display module
Extension module 1 ... 8
Sensors

Read only• Description• Serial number• Order code
• Hardware version• Software version

This information is provided forevery electronics module available.
Specify the serial numbers and ordercodes when servicing, for example.

Read only• Description• Serial number• Order code
• Hardware version• Software version

This information is provided forevery sensor available. Specify theserial numbers and order codeswhen servicing, for example.

File name assigned
automatically (includes atime stamp)

The information is saved on the SD
card in a "sysinfo" subfolder.
The csv file can be read and edited
in MS Excel, for example. This filecan be used when servicing thedevice.

Save system information
Save to SD card

178

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

DIAG/System information
Function

Options

Heartbeat operation

DeviceInfo
Heartbeat functions are only
available with the appropriate
device version or optional access
code.

Read only• Total operating time
• Counters since reset• Availability• Operating time
• Time in failure• Number of failures• MTBF• MTTR•
Reset counters

Availability
Percentage of time no error with thestatus signal F was pending(Operating time - Time in
failure)*100% /Operating time
Time in failure
Total amount of time an error withthe status signal F was pending
MTBF
Mean Time Between Failures(Operating time - Time in failure)/
Number of failures
MTTR
Mean Time To Repair
Time in failure/Number of
failures1)

Provided you give the manufacturer all the information about changes to the hardware.

11.10.2 Sensor information‣ Select the channel you want from the list of channels.
Information in the following categories is displayed:• Extreme values
Extreme conditions to which the sensor was previously exposed, e. g. min./max.
temperatures 2)• Operating time
Operating time of the sensor under defined extreme conditions• Calibration information
Calibration data of the last calibration• Sensor specifications
Measuring range limits for main measured value and temperature• General information
Information on sensor identification
The specific data that are displayed depends on what sensor is connected.

11.10.3 Simulation
You can simulate values at inputs and outputs for testing purposes:• Current values at current outputs• Measured values at inputs• Relay contact opening or closing
Only current values are simulated. Via the simulation function, it is not possible tocalculate the totalized value for the flow or rainfall.

‣ Before simulation: Enable the inputs and outputs in the Setup menu.

2)

Not available for all sensor types.

Endress+Hauser

179

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Liquistation CSF48

DIAG/Simulation
Function

Options

Current output x:y
Simulation

Info
Simulation of an output current
This menu appears once for each current output.

Selection
• Off
• On

If you simulate the value at the current output,
this is indicated on the display by a simulation
icon in front of the current value.

Factory setting
Off
Current

2.4 to 23.0 mA‣ Set the desired simulation value.

Factory setting
4 mA
Alarm relay
Relay x:y
Simulation

Simulation of a relay stateThis menu appears once for each relay.
Selection
• Off
• On

If you simulate the relay state, this is indicatedon the display by a simulation icon in front of
the relay display.

Factory setting
Off
State

Selection• Low• HighFactory setting
Low

Meas. inputs

The relay switches in accordance with yoursetting when you switch on the simulation. On
the measured value display, you see On (= Low)
or Off(= High) for the simulated relay state.
Simulation of a measured value (only forsensors)
This menu appears once for each measuring
input.

Channel : parameter

Simulation‣ Set the desired simulation value.

Selection
• Off
• On

If you simulate the measured value, this isindicated on the display by a simulation icon in
front of the measured value.

Factory setting
Off
Main value

Depends on the sensor‣ Set the desired simulation value.

Sim. temperature

Selection
• Off
• On

If you simulate the temperature measured value,
this is indicated on the display by a simulation
icon in front of the temperature.

Factory setting
Off
Temperature-50.0 to +250.0 °C(-58.0 to 482.0 °F)‣ Set the desired simulation value.

Factory setting
20.0 °C (68.0 °F)
Binary input x:yBinary output x:y
Simulation

Simulation of a binary input or output signal
The number of submenus available corresponds
to the number of binary inputs or outputs.
Selection
• Off
• On
Factory setting
Off

State

180

Selection• Low• HighEndress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

11.10.4 Device test
Menu/Diagnostics/System test
Function
Power supply

Options

Info

Read only

The current supply voltage is displayed.

Heartbeat
Perform
verification

Heartbeat verification will influence the device’s
output signals and their statuses. Please ensure
safe process control conditions.
1.

Press OK.

2.

Answer the questions and confirm at theend by pressing OK.
 The overall result of the verification
is displayed.

Verification
results

Result display• Customer
Customized text, maximum 32 characters• Location
Customized text, maximum 32 characters• Verification report
Automatic time stamp• Verification ID
Automatic counter• Overall result
Passed or failed

Export to SDcard

Export the verification report as a pdf file• Detailed report on various device tests• Input and output information• Device information• Sensor information
The report is ready to be printed out and signed.
You can file it immediately in an operations log,
for example.

Cooling system (only for version with sample compartment temperature regulation)
Check coolingPower supply

Read only

The current supply voltage is displayed.
With AC power supply: 24 V ±0.5 V
With DC power supply: 22 to 28 V

Overcurrent

Read only

No: no error
Yes: the fan in the climate control module isdefective‐> Contact the Service Department

Sample compartment

Read only

The current temperature of the sample
compartment is displayed.

Sample compartment

Read only

When you start the cooling test, the temperature
at the start time is displayed

Cooling test off or Cooling test on -> progress is displayed
Start Test

ActionStart the cooling test.

Stop test

ActionEnd the cooling test.

Power supply

Read only

The current supply voltage is displayed.
With AC power supply: 24 V ±0.5 V
With DC power supply: 22 to 28 V

Overcurrent

Read only

No: no error
Yes: the heating is defective‐> Contact the Service Department

Check heating

Endress+Hauser

181

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Liquistation CSF48

Menu/Diagnostics/System test
Function

Options

Info

Overcurrent

Read only

No: no error
Yes: the fan is defective‐> Contact the Service Department

Sample compartment

Read only

The current temperature of the sample
compartment is displayed.

Sample compartment

Read only

When you start the heating test, thetemperature at the start time is displayed

Heating test off or Heating test on -> progress is displayed
Start Test

ActionStart the heating test.

Stop test

ActionEnd the heating test.

Manual sampling
Bottle configuration

Read only

Bottle configuration

Read only

Bottle configuration

Selection• Front• Bottle 1...
• BackSelect which bottle should be filled with thesample.

Sample volume

50 to 2000 ml
10 to 10000 ml

You can change the sample volume in theversion with the peristaltic pump. The sample
volume can be changed.

Factory setting
100 mlSample volume
Start sampling

Factory setting
200 mlThe sample volume is preset at the factory in theversion with the vacuum pump.

ActionPeristaltic pump (only for version with peristaltic pump)
Pump purge
Pump purge, to stoppress ESC

Read only

Current pump
operating time

Read only

Power supply

Read only

The current supply voltage is displayed.
With AC power supply: 24 V ±0.5 V
With DC power supply: 22 to 28 V

Motor current

Read only

The current consumption of the pump is
displayed.

VacuumRead only

The vacuum is an indicator of the suction height.
-> 100 mbar corresponds to approx. 1 m suction
heightMedium detected

Read only

Yes: the medium was detected
No: no medium was detected

Pump suction

182

ActionActionPump suction, to stoppress ESC

Read only

Current pump
operating time

Read only

Power supply

Read only

The current supply voltage is displayed.
With AC power supply: 24 V ±0.5 V
With DC power supply: 22 to 28 V

Motor current

Read only

The current consumption of the pump is
displayed.

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Menu/Diagnostics/System test
Function

OptionsInfo

VacuumRead only

The vacuum is an indicator of the suction height.
-> 100 mbar corresponds to approx. 1 m suction
heightMedium detected

Read only

Yes: the medium was detected
No: no medium was detected

Vacuum pump(only for version withvacuum pump)

ActionBottle configuration

Read only

Bottle volume

Read only

Distributor position

Selection• Front• Bottle 1...
• BackSelect which bottle should be filled with thesample.

Sample volume

Factory setting
200 mlThe sample volume is preset at the factory.

ActionPerform sampling manually.

Progress

Read only

The progress of the sampling operation isdisplayed.

Power supply

Read only

The current supply voltage is displayed.
With AC power supply: 24 V ±0.5 V
With DC power supply: 22 to 28 V

Motor current

Read only

The current consumption of the pump is
displayed.

Medium LF1

Read only

Medium LF2

Read only• Medium detection LF1 switchoff• Medium detection LF2 disconnection fromprotective circuit

Start sampling‐> Both "No" at the start‐> If "Yes", clean LF2Inline sampling
Action(only for version with sampling
assembly)
Sampling activated, to stop Read onlypress ESC
Progress
Distribution arm

Read only
ActionOnly for bottle configurations with more than
one bottle.

Test distribution arm

Read only

Position

Read only

When the menu item is activated, thedistribution arm undergoes a test run.
Afterwards, the system moves to each positionin succession and the position is displayed. In thecase of plate distribution, the arm moves left andright to ensure the bottles are numberedconsecutively.
the distribution arm if the arm is Calibrate
not positioned precisely over the bottles.

Power supply

Endress+Hauser

Read only

Detailed list of power supply to instrument.

• Digital supply 1: 1.2V
• Digital supply 2: 3.3V
• Analog supply: 12.5V• Sensor supply: 24V• Temperature

actual values can vary without a Themalfunction having occurred.

183

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Liquistation CSF48

11.11 Resetting the device
Menu/Diagnostics
Function

Options

Info

Device restart

Selection
• OK
• ESC

Restart and keep all the settings

Factory default

Selection
• OK
• ESC

Restart with factory settings Settings that havenot been saved are lost.

11.11.1 Operating time information
The following information is displayed:• Operating hours device:
Displays the total operating hours of the device in days, hours and minutes• Operating hours cooling (only for version with climate control module):
Displays the total operating hours of the compressor in days, hours and minutes• Overfill sensor (for version with vacuum pump):
Number of times a safety switchoff has been caused by LF2• Dosing valve (for version with vacuum pump):
Number of times the dosing valve is actuated; ‐> corresponds to the number of samples
taken• Vacuum pump (for version with vacuum pump):
Displays the pump operating time in hours and minutes• Sample totalizer (for version with peristaltic pump):
Number of all samples taken and sample errors• Pump tube life (for version with peristaltic pump):
Displays how old the tube is in days, hours and minutes• Peristaltic pump (for version with peristaltic pump):
Displays the pump operating time in hours and minutes
This counter must be reset when a tube is replaced.
• Inline armature (for version with sampling assembly):
Number of all samples taken.
• Filter mats:
Displays the period of usage in days
• Operating time photometer:
Displays the hours of operation in hours• Operating time cooling module:(optional): Displays the period of usage in days.
With Reset, you reset the counter to zero.

11.11.2 Status of inputs/outputs
Path: MEAS/Measurement
The following measured values are listed (read only):• Binary inputs
Current function state: on or off• Current inputs
Actual current values of all the current inputs available• Alarm relay
Current function state: on or off

184

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Diagnostics and troubleshooting• Binary outputs
Current function state: on or off• Temperature sensors
Current value is displayed: S:1 (cooling system)• Current outputs(for version with sensors with the Memosens protocol) Actual current values of thecurrent outputs

11.12 Firmware history
Date

VersionChanges to firmware

Documentation

10/2022 01.12.01 Improvement
Simple transmission of bottle position and bottle level via
the fieldbus

BA00443C/07/EN/26.22
BA00478C/07/EN/11.22
BA01407C/07/EN/08.22

04/2021 01.09.00 Improvement• Signal type at binary input to control program events• Possible to reset counters when sampling programs arepaused

BA00443C/07/EN/25.21
BA00478C/07/EN/10.21
BA00479C/07/EN/23.21
BA01407C/07/EN/07.21

05/2018 01.06.06 Extension
Heartbeat Monitoring and Verification

BA00444C/07/EN/22.18

Improvement• New soft keys ALL and NONE in multiple choice editors• Manual factor for CAS51D nitrate• Calibration timer and validity revised for pH, conductivity,
oxygen and disinfection• Clear distinction between offset and 1-point calibration
for pH• Heartbeat verification report can now also be downloaded
via the web server• Better description of diagnostics code 013
03/2016 01.06.00 Extension• "Ensure activation" switch with subprogram activation"Interval" ("Bavarian sampling")• Binary input can switch sampling to the hold stateBA00444C/07/EN/19.16
BA00486C/07/EN/02.13
BA01245C/07/EN/03.16

Improvement• Sensors can be calibrated while the program is running• Incremental sampling moved after diagnostics/device test
• Dosing time for vacuum sampling can be adjusted• Binary output can be switched after multiple samples
have been taken• Improved control over the activation/deactivation of
subprograms via binary inputs• Specification of "Volume per bottle" in the run screen• Program can be started at a specific time
• Paused program can be restarted with new "Continue
program" entry via MODE soft key• Minimum sampling time and dosing time reduced to 1 s
for in-line sampling
03/2015 01.05.02 Extension• Time exceeded with flow proportional sampling• Outputs

BA00443C/07/EN/19.15
BA01245C/07/EN/02.15

Improvement• Menu corrections (functions, designations)• Chemoclean Plus for samplers

Endress+Hauser

185

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Date

Liquistation CSF48

VersionChanges to firmware

12/2013 01.05.00 Extension• Chemoclean Plus
• Calendar function for cleaning• Conductivity:• Measuring range switching also for conductive
conductivity measurement• External temperature signal via current input• Oxygen:• External pressure or temperature signals via current
input• Connected conductivity sensor can be used to calculate
the salinity.
• SAC, nitrate, turbidity:
Calibration settings can be configured via fieldbus• Channel-specific diagnostics codes for HOLD function.

Documentation
BA00443C/07/EN/18.13
BA00486C/07/EN/02.13
BA01245C/07/EN/01.13

Improvement
Web server login for managing multiple users
12/2013 01.05.00 Extension• Chemoclean Plus
• Calendar function for cleaning• Conductivity:• Measuring range switching also for conductive
conductivity measurement• External temperature signal via current input• Oxygen:• External pressure or temperature signals via current
input• Connected conductivity sensor can be used to calculate
the salinity• SAC, nitrate, turbidity:
Calibration settings can be configured via fieldbus• Channel-specific diagnostics codes for HOLD function.

BA00444C/07/EN/17.13
BA01225C/07/EN/02.13
BA00486C/07/EN/02.13
BA01245C/07/EN/01.13

Improvement• Web server login for managing multiple users• Set point and PID parameters for controllers can be
configured via fieldbus

186

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Date

VersionChanges to firmware

04/2013 01.04.00 Extension• Conductivity:• Measuring range switching• Temperature compensation ISO 7888 at 20 °C• Support for DIO module• Triggering of an external hold• Triggering of a cleaning• Limit switch signals via digital output• Keylock with password protection• pH:• Icon for manual and automatic temperaturecompensation (ATC/MTC+MED)• Monitoring for the upper and lower limits of the glass
SCS value can be switched on or off independently ofthe other respective value• ISE• Simultaneous calibration of two parameters• User-defined electrode type
• Raw measured values can be selected for current
output• Timer for membrane replacement• Logbooks are preserved after the firmware update

Documentation
BA00465C/07/EN/15.13
BA00470C/07/EN/15.13
BA00492C/07/EN/15.13
BA00493C/07/EN/15.13
SD01068C/07/EN/01.12

Improvement• PROFIBUS addresses of the acyclic parameters moved tolower slot numbers so they are legible for Simatic S7. The
GSD file is still compatible.
• Offset icon only for pH or ORP• Turbidity: Autoranging can be switched off• Export Print (xml): Export file revised and style sheet
added for better legibility.
• Overview of input with counter function• Input menu accessible via program creation• External signal for basic programs• Quick programming via start screen
04/2013 01.04.00 Extension
07/2013• Conductivity:• Measuring range switching• Temperature compensation ISO 7888 at 20 °C• Support for DIO module• Triggering of an external hold• Triggering of a cleaning• Limit switch signals via digital output• Keylock with password protection• PID controller: Feedforward control is supported• pH:• Icon for manual and automatic temperaturecompensation (ATC/MTC+MED)• Monitoring for the upper and lower limits of the glass
SCS value can be switched on or off independently ofthe other respective value• ISE• Simultaneous calibration of two parameters• User-defined electrode type
• Raw measured values can be selected for current
output• Timer for membrane replacement• Logbooks are preserved after the firmware update

BA00444C/07/EN/16.13
BA01225C/07/EN/01.13
BA00445C/07/EN/16.13
BA01227C/07/EN/01.13
BA00450C/07/EN/16.13
BA00450C/07/EN/17.13
BA00451C/07/EN/15.13
BA00451C/07/EN/16.13
BA00486C/07/EN/01.11
BA00486C/07/EN/02.13

Improvement• PROFIBUS address range for Siemens-S7 moved to lower
range.
• Offset icon only for pH or ORP• Turbidity: Autoranging can be switched off• Export Print (xml): Export file revised and style sheet
added for better legibility.
Original firmware

Endress+Hauser

187

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Date

Liquistation CSF48

VersionChanges to firmware

Documentation

06/2012 01.03.01 Improvement• Hold via soft key• Global or channel-specific hold stops automatic cleaning.
Manual cleaning can be started, however.
• Adapted factory settings

BA00444C/07/EN/15.12
BA00445C/07/EN/15.12
BA00450C/07/EN/15.12
BA00451C/07/EN/14.11
BA00486C/07/EN/01.11

12/2011 01.03.00 Extension• Max. 8 sensor channels supported• Current inputs• PROFIBUS DP supported incl. Profile 3.02
• Modbus RTU (RS485) supported• Modbus TCP supported• Integrated web server supported via TCPIP (RJ45)• USP/EP (United States Pharmacopoeia und European
Pharmacopoeia) and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) for
conductivity• Icon for "controller active" in measuring screen

BA00444C/07/EN/14.11
BA00445C/07/EN/14.11
BA00450C/07/EN/14.11
BA00451C/07/EN/14.11
BA00486C/07/EN/01.11

Improvement• Controller hold via analog input• Adapted factory settings• SAC: factory calibration in the field incl. reset filter
operation time and lamp change• ISFET leak current visible in measuring screen• Multiselect for limit switch and cleaning cycles
12/2010 01.02.00 Extension• Support for additional sensors:• Chlorine
• ISE
• SAC
• Interface• HART communication• Mathematical functions

BA444C/07/EN/13.10
BA445C/07/EN/13.10
BA450C/07/EN/13.10
BA451C/07/EN/13.10
BA00486C/07/EN/01.11

Improvement• Modified software structures• Adapted factory settings• User-defined measuring screens
03/2010 01.00.00 Original software

BA444C/07/EN/03.10
BA445C/07/EN/03.10
BA450C/07/EN/03.10
BA451C/07/EN/03.10

12/2011 01.03

BA00443C/07/EN/15.11
BA00463C/07/EN/15.11
BA00464C/07/EN/15.11
BA00467C/07/EN/15.11

Extension• PROFIBUS DP supported incl. Profile 3.02
• Modbus RTU (RS485) supported• Modbus TCP supported• Sampling program control via fieldbus• Sampling via sampling assembly• Low-power mode for cooling system• USP/EP (United States Pharmacopoeia und European
Pharmacopoeia) and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) for
conductivity
Improvement• Adapted factory settings• SAC: factory calibration in the field incl. reset filter
operation time and lamp change• ISFET leak current visible in measuring screen• Multiselect for limit switch and cleaning cycles

188

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Date

Version04/2011 01.02

Changes to firmware

Documentation

Extension• Support for additional sensors:• Chlorine
• ISE
• SAC
• Interface• HART communication• Mathematical functions

BA443C/07/EN/14.11
BA463C/07/EN/14.11
BA464C/07/EN/14.11
BA467C/07/EN/14.11

Improvement• Modified software structures• Adapted factory settings• User-defined measuring screens
04/2010 01.00

Endress+Hauser

Original firmware

BA443C/07/EN/04.10
BA463C/07/EN/04.10
BA464C/07/EN/04.10
BA467C/07/EN/04.10

189Maintenance

Liquistation CSF48

12

Maintenance

LWARNING
Touching moving parts during operation.
Pinching/crushing or severe injuries to hands and fingers.
‣ Stop the program.
‣ Disconnect the device from the mains.
Effects on process and process control‣ Take all the necessary precautions in time to ensure the operational safety andreliability of the entire measuring point.

LWARNING
Process pressure and temperature, contamination, electrical voltage
Risk of serious or fatal injury‣ Avoid hazards posed by pressure, temperature and contamination.
‣ Make sure the device is de-energized before you open it.
‣ Power can be supplied to switching contacts from separate circuits. De-energize thesecircuits before working on the terminals.
NOTICE
Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
Risk of damaging the electronic components‣ Take personal protective measures to avoid ESD, such as discharging beforehand at PEor permanent grounding with a wrist strap.
‣ For your own safety, use only genuine spare parts. With genuine parts, the function,accuracy and reliability are also ensured after maintenance work.

LCAUTION
Possibility of microbiological contamination of content of sample bottles.
Minor to medium injury possible.
‣ Wear suitable protective clothing.

12.1

Maintenance tasks

12.1.1

Recommended maintenance

Maintenance work has to be carried out at regular intervals to ensure the efficient
operation of the sampler.
The maintenance work comprises:• Replacing the wear parts• Cleaning the device
The cleaning intervals depend heavily on:• The medium• The ambient conditions of the sampler (dust etc.)• The programming intervals
For this reason, adapt the cleaning intervals to your specific requirements but always
ensure that these cleaning tasks are performed regularly.
Replacing wear parts
Wear parts are replaced by Endress+Hauser Service at one- and two-year intervals. Pleasecontact your local sales center in this regard.
Endress+Hauser offers its customers a maintenance contract. A maintenance contract
increases the operational safety of your device and reduces your staff's workload. Ask
your Endress+Hauser Service Organization for detailed information on maintenancecontracts.
190

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Maintenance12.1.2

Calibration

Sensors• Sensors with Memosens protocol are calibrated at the factory.
• Users must decide whether the process conditions present require calibration duringinitial commissioning.
• Additional calibration is not required in many standard applications.

‣ Calibrate sensors at sensible intervals depending on the process.
Operating Instructions "Memosens", BA01245C
All connected sensors can be calibrated while a sampling program is active.
Distribution arm
The position of the distribution arm is set at the factory. It is only possible to calibrate the
distribution arm in the version with multiple bottles.
The distribution arm must be calibrated if:• The distribution arm motor has been replaced• Error message "F328 Distribution arm" appears on the display
Proceed as follows to calibrate the distribution arm:
1.

Make the setting for the number of bottles in the "Setup/Basic setup" menu.

2.

Under menu Calibration active/Distribution arm/Go to ref. point The reference run is started. The reference point is in the middle at the front. For
the version with a distributor plate, the reference point is at the arrow in the
middle of the plate.
With Adjust, you can correct the distribution arm if the unit does not move to thereference point correctly. Use the two arrow keys to correct the position.

3.

Perform the distribution arm test in the menu Diagnostics/System test/Reset/
Distribution arm"

Sample volume or vacuum pump
The dosing volume of the vacuum pump is set to 200 ml (6.76 oz) at the factory. The
required sample volume is set by moving the dosing pipe manually.
NOTICE
Calibration not possible during operation.
The sample volume cannot be determined.
‣ Stop the sampling program before calibrating the sample volume.
Sampling volume calibration
Proceed as follows to calibrate the sample volume:

Endress+Hauser

191

Maintenance

Liquistation CSF48

5

4
3
2

6

1

A0013896

 81

Vacuum pump

1
2
3
4
5
6

Outflow hose
Dosing glass
Dosing glass cover
Air hose connection
Lock for intake hoseThread adapter nut for intake hose

1.

Check the sample volume set in the Setup/Basic settings/Sampling/Dosing volume
menu.

2.

Slacken the thread adapter nut on the intake hose (item 6).

3.

Turn the intake hose at the lock (item 5) to the "open" position and pull the hose
upwards to disconnect it.

4.

Release the air hose (item 4) and remove the dosing glass (item 2) along with theoutflow hose (item 1) from the front.

5.

Open the bayonet lock (item 3) and open the dosing glass.

Dosing3
2

1
A0014128

 82

192

Vacuum pump

1
2
3

Dosing tube
Allen screw
Air hose connection

1.

Release the 2 mm (0.08 in) Allen screw with the key provided.

2.

Set the sample volume by adjusting the dosing tube. Secure the dosing tube with thescrew.

3.

Use the white scale (A) to dose without pressure and the blue scale (B) to dose withpressure.
Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Maintenance4.

Reinstall the parts in reverse order. Make sure that the contacts of the conductivity
sensors are in the correct position.

5.

Check that the dosing tube is set correctly by performing manual sampling.

Capacitance sensor(Only for version with vacuum pump)
The capacitance sensor has already been preset at the factory for water. Only adjust
the sensor if the switching sensitivity needs to be changed. This is the case if thesample covers more than 30% of the sensor (item 1). A yellow and a green light (item2) is lit on the capacitance sensor.
Adjustment
Adjust the capacitance sensor as follows:1

2

3

A0015413

 83

Capacitance sensor adjustment

1
2
3

SensorYellow and green light
Adjusting screw

1.

Make sure the measuring jug is empty.

2.

Turn back slightly to the left (counterclockwise) until the yellow light is on again. At
this point the sensor is adjusted to the most sensitive setting.

3.

Perform a manual sampling in order to verify the setting.

4.

If this setting is too sensitive (incorrect triggering or the yellow light does not comeback on after sampling), adjust the sensor to a more insensitive setting by turning theadjusting screw further to the left.

Peristaltic pump sample volume
The sample volume of the peristaltic pump is calibrated at the factory.
In order to calibrate the sample volume, a measurement beaker with a volume of atleast 200 ml is required.

Endress+Hauser

193

Maintenance

Liquistation CSF48

Proceed as follows to calibrate:
Menu/Calibration active
Function

Options

Info

Distributor position

Selection• Front• Bottle x• BackSelect the distributor position.

Sample volume

20 to 2000 m

Set the sample volume.

Sample volume
1-point calibration

Factory setting
100 mlStart sampling

ActionThe progress of the sampling operation isdisplayed.

Check whether the sample volume is correct. Press No to enter the sample volume actually taken, e.g.
 110
ml.
Press

Yes to repeat the sampling.

2-point calibration
Use 2-point calibration for levels that fluctuate greatly. The second sampling point must be either higheror lower (height difference of at least 1 m).
Distributor position

Selection• Front• Bottle x• BackSelect the distributor position.

Sample volume

20 to 2000 ml

Set the sample volume.

Factory setting
100 mlStart 1. sampling

ActionThe progress of the sampling operation isdisplayed.

Check whether the sample volume is correct. Press No to enter the sample volume actually taken, e.g.
 110
ml.
Press

Yes to repeat the sampling.

Start 2. sampling

ActionThe progress of the sampling operation isdisplayed.

Check whether the sample volume is correct. Press No to enter the sample volume actually taken, e.g.
 110
ml.
Press

12.1.3

Yes to repeat the sampling.

Replacing the pump tube

LWARNING
Rotating parts
Minor to medium injury possible.
‣ Take the sampler out of service before opening the peristaltic pump.
‣ Secure the sampler against unintentional start-up while you work on the opened hose
pump.

194

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

MaintenanceOpening the peristaltic pump
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

4
5

3

6

Retainer
Pump tube
Fastening clip
Pump bracket
Pump head cover
Positioning pin
Knurled head screw

7
2

1

A0014115

 84

Opening the peristaltic pump

1.

Take the sampler out of service by pausing a program that is currently running.

2.

Open the fastening clip (item 3) and push up the pump bracket (item 4).

3.

Remove the knurled head screw (item 7) and open the pump head cover (item 5) tothe right.

4.

Remove the knurled head screw (item 7) and swing down the pump head cover (item5).

Replacing the pump tube
1
2
8
9
10

Retainer
Pump tube
Clamp
Marking ring
Roller109
8
2
1A0014116

 85

Endress+Hauser

Replacing the pump tube

1.

Remove the clamp (item 8) and remove the pump tube (item 2) from the pump.

2.

Remove any silicone deposits on the roller (item 10) and the flexible pump bracket.

3.

Make sure the roller and the individual rolls turn smoothly and evenly.

4.

Apply some lubricant to the roller and to the inside of the pump bracket.

5.

Secure the new pump tube to the pressure sensor with the clamp (item 8).

6.

Guide the pump tube around the roller and introduce the marking ring into thegroove (item 9).

7.

Close the pump head cover and screw it tight.

8.

Close the pump bracket.
195

Maintenance

Liquistation CSF48

9.

To avoid incorrect metering, reset the tube life to zero under Menu/Diagnostics/
Operating time information/Pump tube life using the "Reset" function.

10. Calibrate the sample volume each time you replace a pump tube. →  191

12.1.4

Cleaning

Housing
NOTICE
Cleaning agents not permitted
Damage to the housing surface or housing seal
‣ Never use concentrated mineral acids or alkaline solutions for cleaning.
‣ Never use organic cleaners such as acetone, benzyl alcohol, methanol, methylene
chloride, xylene or concentrated glycerol cleaner.
‣ Never use high-pressure steam for cleaning.

‣ Clean the front of the housing using commercially available cleaning agents only.
The front of the housing is resistant to the following in accordance with DIN 42 115:• Ethanol (for a short time)• Diluted acids (max. 2% HCl)
• Diluted bases (max. 3% NaOH)• Soap-based household cleaning agents
Wetted parts‣ After cleaning, rinse all wetted parts thoroughly with clear water to ensure that all
cleaning agent residue has been removed so it cannot affect subsequent medium
samples.

Version with vacuum pump
Clean the wetted parts as follows:

5

4
3
2

6

1

A0013896

 86

196

Vacuum pump

1
2
3
4
5
6

Outflow hose
Dosing glass
Dosing glass cover
Air hose connection
Lock for intake hoseThread adapter nut for intake hose

1.

Slacken the thread adapter nut on the intake hose (item 6).
Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Maintenance2.

Turn the intake hose at the lock (item 5) to the "open" position and pull the hose
upwards to disconnect it.

3.

Release the air hose (item 4) and remove the dosing glass (item 2) along with theoutflow hose (item 1) from the front.

4.

Open the bayonet lock (item 3) and open the dosing glass.

5.

Clean the parts (hoses, dosing glass etc.) with water or soapsuds. Use a bottle brush ifnecessary.
 You can wash the dosing glass and dosing glass cover in a dishwasher at 60 °C.

6.

Check that the dosing tube is set correctly and set the old value if necessary.

7.

Reinstall the cleaned parts in reverse order.

Version with peristaltic pump
Clean the wetted parts as follows:1
2

3

A0014004

 87

Version with peristaltic pump

1
2
3

Pump tube
Pressure sensor
Hose connection

1.

Release the sample supply at the tube connection (item 3).

2.

Connect a vessel containing clear water to the tube connection.

3.

Remove the bottles from the sample compartment.

4.

Rinse the wetted parts with clear water by taking a manual sample or by performing
a pump test (under Menu/Diagnostics/System test/ -> Peristaltic pump/Pump
purge/Pump suction

5.

Release the couplings to the left and right of the pressure sensor (item 2). Clean the
tube piece carefully with a bottle brush and rinse it with clear water.

6.

Reconnect the sample supply to the tube connection and put the bottles back in thesample compartment.

LWARNING
Rotating parts
Minor to medium injury possible.
‣ Do not open the cover of the peristaltic pump while the pump is operating.
‣ Secure the sampler against unintentional start-up whilst you work on the opened hosepump.

Endress+Hauser

197

Maintenance

Liquistation CSF48

Interior of peristaltic pump
1
2
3

Pump rotor
RollerPump tube

1
2
3

A0014029

 88

Interior view of the peristaltic pump

1.

Take the sampler out of service by pausing a program that is currently running.

2.

Open the peristaltic pump as described in →  194.

3.

Remove the pump tube.

4.

Remove any silicone deposits on the roller and on the flexible pump bracket.

5.

Make sure the roller turns smoothly and evenly.

Version with sampling assembly
Refer to Operating Instructions BA00499C for information on cleaning the sampling
assembly.
Cleaning the distribution arm
Clean the distribution arm as follows:1
2
3

Distribution arm
motor
Drain pipe
Distribution arm

1
2
3

A0014112

 89

Sample compartment

1.

Untighten the drain pipe (item 2).

2.

Push up the splash guard.

3.

Remove the distribution arm from the front.

4.

Remove the cover.

5.

Clean the parts with water or soapsuds. Use a bottle brush if necessary.

6.

Reinstall the cleaned parts in reverse order.
Make sure the distribution arm is seated correctly! The distribution arm must be
locked as otherwise the rotation movement could be blocked or the system might nolonger approach the bottles correctly.

Sample compartment
The sample compartment has a continuous inner plastic lining.
1.
198

Remove the bottle trays or the individual bottles and the distribution pan.
Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Maintenance2.

Remove the distribution arm.

3.

Spray-clean the sample compartment with a water hose.
You can wash the PE and glass bottles in a dishwasher at 60 °C.

Ventilator and liquefier2
1

A0013898 90
12

Cleaning the climate control module

LiquefierVentilator‣ Clean the liquefier and ventilator with compressed air.
Digital sensors

LCAUTION
Programs not switched off during maintenance activities.
Risk of injury due to medium or cleaning agent!
‣ Quit any programs that are active.
‣ Switch to the service mode.
‣ If testing the cleaning function while cleaning is in progress, wear protective clothing,goggles and gloves or take other suitable measures to protect yourself.
Replacing the sensor while ensuring measuring point availability
If an error occurs or the maintenance schedule stipulates that the sensor has to be
replaced, use a new sensor, or a sensor that has been precalibrated in the laboratory.
• A sensor is calibrated in the laboratory under optimum external conditions, thereby
ensuring better quality of measurement.
• You must perform onsite calibration if you use a sensor that is not precalibrated.

Endress+Hauser

1.

Pay attention to the safety instructions regarding the removal of the sensor that areprovided in the Operating Instructions for the sensor.

2.

Remove the sensor that requires maintenance.

3.

Install the new sensor.
 The sensor data are automatically accepted by the transmitter. A release code is
not required.
Measurement is resumed.

4.

Take the used sensor back to the laboratory.
 In the laboratory get the sensor ready for reuse while ensuring the availability ofthe measuring point.
199

Maintenance

Liquistation CSF48

Prepare the sensor for reuse
1.

Clean sensor.
 For this purpose, use the cleaning agent specified in the sensor manual.

2.

Inspect the sensor for cracks or other damage.

3.

If no damage is found, regenerate the sensor. Where necessary, store the sensor in aregeneration solution (→ sensor manual).

4.

Recalibrate the sensor for reuse.

Assemblies
Refer to the assembly operating instructions for information on servicing andtroubleshooting the assembly. The assembly operating manual describes theprocedure for mounting and disassembling the assembly, replacing the sensors andseals, and contains information on the material resistance properties, as well as onspare parts and accessories.

12.1.5

Replacing the rechargeable batteriesFirst remove the cover of the power unit to replace the optional rechargeable batteries.

LWARNING
The device is live!
Incorrect connection may result in injury or death‣ Make sure the device is disconnected from the power source before you remove thecover of the power unit.
3.

1.
2.

A0012831

 91

200

Removing the cover on the power unit

1.

Release the screw with an Allen key (5 mm).

2.

Remove the cover of the power unit from the front.

3.

When reassembling make sure that the seals are seated correctly.

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Maintenance

1

A0014114

 92
1

Replacing the rechargeable batteries

Rechargeable batteries‣ Replace the rechargeable batteries every three years with the following type of battery:Panasonic LC-R127R2PG1

12.1.6

Technical support

We recommend the purchase and use of an SD card (see accessories). You can savethe entire sampler configuration on the SD card and make the data available to theservice team should you require technical assistance.

Endress+Hauser

201

Repair

Liquistation CSF48

13

Repair

13.1

Spare parts

The repair and conversion concept provides for the following:• The product has a modular design• Spare parts are grouped into kits which include the associated kit instructions• Only use original spare parts from the manufacturer• Repairs are carried out by the manufacturer's Service Department or by trained users• Certified devices can only be converted to other certified device versions by the
manufacturer's Service Department or at the factory• Observe applicable standards, national regulations, Ex documentation (XA) andcertificates
1.

Carry out the repair according to the kit instructions.

2.

Document the repair and conversion and enter, or have entered, in the Life Cycle
Management tool (W@M).

Device spare parts that are currently available for delivery can be found on the website:www.endress.com/device-viewer‣ Quote the serial number of the device when ordering spare parts.

13.2

ReturnThe product must be returned if repairs or a factory calibration are required, or if thewrong product was ordered or delivered. As an ISO-certified company and also due to legal
regulations, Endress+Hauser is obliged to follow certain procedures when handling any
returned products that have been in contact with medium.
To ensure the swift, safe and professional return of the device:‣ Refer to the website www.endress.com/support/return-material for information on theprocedure and conditions for returning devices.

13.3

Disposal

If required by the Directive 2012/19/EU on waste electrical and electronic equipment(WEEE), the product is marked with the depicted symbol in order to minimize thedisposal of WEEE as unsorted municipal waste. Do not dispose of products bearing thismarking as unsorted municipal waste. Instead, return them to the manufacturer for
disposal under the applicable conditions.
The device contains electronic components. The product must be disposed of as electronic
waste.

‣ Observe the local regulations.
Dispose of batteries correctly‣ Always dispose of batteries in accordance with local regulations on battery disposal.

202

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Accessories

14

Accessories

The following are the most important accessories available at the time this documentation
was issued.
Listed accessories are technically compatible with the product in the instructions.
1.

Application-specific restrictions of the product combination are possible.
Ensure conformity of the measuring point to the application. This is the responsibilityof the operator of the measuring point.

2.

Pay attention to the information in the instructions for all products, particularly thetechnical data.

3.

For accessories not listed here, please contact your Service or Sales Center.

14.1

Endress+Hauser

Device-specific accessories

Order no.

Bottle tray + bottles + cover

71162811

Bottle tray + 2 x 3.8 liter (1.00 US gal.) glass + cover

71134282

Bottle tray + 6 x 1.8 liter (0.48 US gal.) glass + cover

71111152

Bottle tray + 6 x 3 liter (0.79 US gal.) PE+ cover

71111153

Bottle tray + 12 x 1 liter (0.26 US gal.) glass + cover

71111154

Bottle tray + 12 x 1 liter (0.26 US gal.) PE + cover

71111155

Bottle tray + 12 x 2 liter (0.53 US gal.) PE wedge-shaped bottle + cover

71111156

Bottle tray + 24 x 1 liter (0.26 US gal.) PE wedge-shaped bottle + cover

71111157

Bottle tray + 12 x 1 liter (0.26 US gal.) + 6 x 2 liter (0.53 US gal.) PE wedge-shaped
bottle + cover

71185981

Bottle tray + 12 x 2 liter (0.53 US gal.) square PE + cover

71449838

Bottle tray 12x1L / 6x3L / 6x1.8L

Order no.

Distributor plate; centering plate

71111158

Distributor plate for 2 x 6 bottles

71111159

Distributor plate for 2 x 12 bottles

71111160

Distributor plate for 1‐2 + 12 bottles

71111161

Distributor plate for 1‐2 + 12 bottles

71111162

Distributor plate for 6 + 12 bottles

71185983

Distributor plate for 2 x 12 bottles, 2 liters, PE

71185984

Distributor plate for 1-2 + 12 bottles, 2 liter, PE

71111163

Centering plate for bottle tray with wedge-shaped bottles

71186013

Centering plate for 4 x 5 liters Schott DURAN GLS 80 bottles

Order no.

Bottles + covers

71111164

1 liter (0.26 US gal.) PE + cover, 24 pcs

71111165

1 liter (0.26 US gal.) glass + cover, 24 pcs

71134277

1.8 liter (0.48 US gal.) glass + cover, 6 pcs

71185985

2 liter (0.53 US gal.) PE, square + cover, 24 pcs

71111167

3 liter (0.79 US gal.) PE + cover, 12 pcs

71162812

3.8 liter (1.00 US gal.) glass + cover, 1 pc

203

Accessories

204

Liquistation CSF48

Order no.

Bottles + covers

71111169

13 liter (3.43 US gal.) PE + cover, 1 pc

71111170

25 liter (5.28 US gal.) PE + cover, 1 pc

71111172

30 liter (7.92 US gal.) PE + cover, 1 pc

71111173

60 liter (15.8 US gal.) PE + cover, 1 pc

71111176

1 liter (0.26 US gal.) PE wedge-shaped bottle + cover, 24 pcs

71111178

2 liter (0.53 US gal.) PE wedge-shaped bottle + cover, 12 pcs

71146645

17 liter (4.49 US gal.) PE, 1 pc

Order no.

Complete suction line

71111233

Suction line ID 10 mm (3/8"), PVC, reinforced fabric, length 10 m (33 ft), suction head
V4A

71111234

Suction line ID 10 mm (3/8"), EPDM, length 10 m (33 ft), suction head V4A

71111235

Suction line ID 13 mm (1/2"), PVC, reinforced spiral wire, length 10 m (33 ft), suction
head V4A

71111236

Suction line ID 13 mm (1/2"), EPDM, length 10 m (33 ft), suction head V4A

71111237

Suction line ID 16 mm (5/8"), PVC, reinforced spiral wire, length 10 m (33 ft), suction
head V4A

71111238

Suction line ID 16 mm (5/8"), EPDM, length 10 m (33 ft), suction head V4A

71111239

Suction line ID 19 mm (3/4"), PVC, reinforced spiral wire, length 10 m (33 ft), suction
head V4A

71111240

Suction line ID 19 mm (3/4"), EPDM, length 10 m (33 ft), suction head V4A

Order no.

Terminated hose: vacuum pump

71111188

Dosing hose to distributor, 2 pcs, material: silicon

71111189

Dosing hose to distributor, 25 pcs, material: silicon

Order no.

Terminated hose: peristaltic pump

71111191

Pump tubing, 2 pcs; material: silicon

71111192

Pump tubing, 25 pcs; material: silicon

Order no.

Retrofit kits

71111195

Kit CSF48: Retrofit kit distribution assembly (distribution arm, distribution arm drive)

71111196

Kit CSF48: Retrofit kit casters

71111197

Kit CSF48: Retrofit kit stand, V2A; 304(x)71111198

Kit CSF48: Retrofit kit stand, V4A; 316(x)71111199

Kit CSF48: Retrofit kit for flow assembly, without stand; with stand cover V2A; 304(x)71111200

Kit CSF48: Retrofit kit for flow assembly, without stand; with stand cover V4A; 316(x)71111205

Kit CSF48: Retrofit kit for temperature sensor PT1000

71111210

Kit CSF48: Retrofit kit 1x to 2x digital sensor, Memosens protocol + 2x output
0/4-20mA (software)

71146969

Kit CSF48: Retrofit kit 2x digital sensor + 2x output 0/4-20mA and extension
backplane

71136999

Kit CSF48: Retrofit kit service interface (CDI flange connector, counter nut)71136885

Kit CSF48: Retrofit kit relay (2x + cable set)Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Endress+Hauser

Accessories

Order no.

Retrofit kits

71136101

Kit CSF48: Retrofit kit door stop (2x)71184459

Kit CSF48: Retrofit kit BASE-E module + backplane extension

71207321

Kit CSF48: Sample distribution 24 x 2 liters

71111053

Kit CM442/CM444/CM448/CSF48/CA80: extension module AOR; 2 x relay, 2 x 0/4
to 20 mA analog output

71125375

Kit CM442/CM444/CM448/CSF48/CA80: extension module 2R; 2 x relay

71125376

Kit CM442/CM444/CM448/CSF48/CA80: extension module 4R; 4 x relay

71135632

Kit CM442/CM444/CM448/CSF48/CA80: extension module 2AO; 2 x 0/4 to 20 mA
analog output

71135633

Kit CM442/CM444/CM448/CSF48/CA80: extension module 4AO; 4 x 0/4 to 20 mA
analog output

71135631

Kit CM444/CM448/CSF48: extension module 2DS; 2 x digital sensor, Memosens

71135634

Kit CM442/CM444/CM448/CSF48/CA80: extension module 485; Ethernet
configuration; can be extended to PROFIBUS DP or Modbus RS485 or Modbus TCP.
This requires an additional activation code which can be ordered separately (seeCommunication; software).

71135638

Kit CM444R/CM448R/CSF48/CA80: extension module DIO; 2 x digital input; 2 x
digital output; auxiliary power supply for digital output

71135639

Kit CM442/CM444/CM448/CSF48/CA80: extension module 2AI; 2 x 0/4 to 20 mA
analog input

71575177

Upgrade kit, extension module 485DP; extension module 485DP; PROFIBUS DP

71575178

Upgrade kit, extension module 485MB; extension module 485MB; Modbus RS485

71140890

Upgrade kit CM442/CM444/CM448/CSF48/CA80; extension module 485; Modbus
TCP (+ Ethernet configuration)

71219868

Upgrade kit CM442/CM444/CM448/CM442R/CM444R/CM448R/CSF48; extension
module 485; EtherNet/IP (+ Ethernet configuration)

71140891

Kit CM444/CM448: Upgrade code for 2 x 0/4 to 20 mA for BASE-E

71107456

Kit CM442/CM444/CM448/CSF48: M12 socket for digital sensors; pre-terminated71140892

Kit CM442/CM444/CM448/CSF48: M12 socket for PROFIBUS DP/Modbus RS485; B‐
coded, pre-terminated71140893

Kit CM442/CM444/CM448/CSF48: M12 socket for Ethernet; D‐coded, preterminatedOrder no.

Communication; software

71239104

Activation code: Chemoclean Plus

71110815

SD card, 1 GB, Industrial Flash Drive

51516983

Commubox FXA291 + FieldCare Device Setup

71129799

Field Data Manager software; 1 license, analysis report

71127100

SD card with Liquiline Firmware, 1 GB, Industrial Flash Drive

71128428

Activation code for digital HART communication

71367524

Activation code for Heartbeat Verification and Monitoring

71135635

Activation code for PROFIBUS DP

71135635

Activation code for PROFIBUS DP

71135637

Activation code for Modbus TCP

71219871

Activation code for EtherNet/IP

71211288

Activation code for feedforward control

71211289

Activation code for measuring range switch

205

Accessories

Liquistation CSF48

14.1.1

Measuring cable

Memosens data cable CYK10• For digital sensors with Memosens technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cyk10
Technical Information TI00118C
Measuring cable CYK81• Unterminated cable for extending sensor cables (e.g. Memosens, CUS31/CUS41)• 2 x 2 cores, twisted with shielding and PVC sheath (2 x 2 x 0.5 mm2 + shielding)• Sold by meter, Order No.: 51502543

14.2

System components

14.2.1

Sensors

Glass electrodes
Orbisint CPS11D• pH sensor for process technology• With dirt-repellent PTFE diaphragm• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cps11d
Technical Information TI00028C
Memosens CPS31D• pH electrode with gel-filled reference system with ceramic diaphragm• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cps31d
Technical Information TI00030C
Ceraliquid CPS41D• pH electrode with ceramic junction and KCl liquid electrolyte• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cps41d
Technical Information TI00079C
Ceragel CPS71D• pH electrode with reference system including ion trap
• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cps71d
Technical Information TI00245C
Orbipore CPS91D• pH electrode with open aperture for media with high dirt load
• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cps91d
Technical Information TI00375C
Orbipac CPF81D• Compact pH sensor for installation or immersion operation• In industrial water and wastewater• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cpf81d
Technical Information TI00191C

206

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Accessories

Pfaudler electrodes
Ceramax CPS341D• pH electrode with pH-sensitive enamel• Meets highest demands of measuring accuracy, pressure, temperature, sterility anddurability• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cps341d
Technical Information TI00468C
ORP sensors
Orbisint CPS12D• ORP sensor for process technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cps12d
Technical Information TI00367C
Ceraliquid CPS42D• ORP electrode with ceramic junction and KCl liquid electrolyte• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cps42d
Technical Information TI00373C
Ceragel CPS72D• ORP electrode with reference system including ion trap
• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cps72d
Technical Information TI00374C
Orbipac CPF82D• Compact ORP sensor for installation or immersion operation in process water andwastewater• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cpf82d
Technical Information TI00191C
Orbipore CPS92D• ORP electrode with open aperture for media with high dirt load
• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cps92d
Technical Information TI00435C
pH-ISFET sensors
Tophit CPS441D• Sterilizable ISFET sensor for low-conductivity media• Liquid KCl electrolyte• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cps441d
Technical Information TI00352C
Tophit CPS471D• Sterilizable and autoclavable ISFET sensor for food and pharmaceutics, processengineering• Water treatment and biotechnology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cps471d
Technical Information TI00283C

Endress+Hauser

207

Accessories

Liquistation CSF48

Tophit CPS491D• ISFET sensor with open aperture for media with high dirt load
• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cps491d
Technical Information TI00377C
Conductivity sensors with inductive measurement of conductivity
Indumax CLS50D• High-durability inductive conductivity sensor• For standard and hazardous area applications• With Memosens technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cls50d
Technical Information TI00182C
Conductivity sensors with conductive measurement of conductivity
Condumax CLS15D• Conductive conductivity sensor• For pure water, ultrapure water and hazardous area applications• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/CLS15dTechnical Information TI00109C
Condumax CLS16D• Hygienic, conductive conductivity sensor• For pure water, ultrapure water and Ex applications• With EHEDG and 3A approval• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/CLS16d
Technical Information TI00227C
Condumax CLS21D• Two-electrode sensor in plug-in head version version• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/CLS21d
Technical Information TI00085C
Memosens CLS82D• Four-electrode sensor• With Memosens technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cls82d
Technical Information TI01188C
Oxygen sensors
Oxymax COS22D• Sterilizable sensor for dissolved oxygen• With Memosens technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cos22d
Technical Information TI00446C
Oxymax COS51D• Amperometric sensor for dissolved oxygen• With Memosens technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cos51d
Technical Information TI00413C

208

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Accessories

Oxymax COS61D• Optical oxygen sensor for drinking water and industrial water measurement• Measuring principle: quenching• With Memosens technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cos61d
Technical Information TI00387C
Memosens COS81D• Sterilizable, optical sensor for dissolved oxygen• With Memosens technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cos81d
Technical Information TI01201C
Chlorine sensors
CCS142D• Membrane-covered amperometric sensor for free chlorine• Measuring range 0.01 to 20 mg/l
• With Memosens technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/ccs142d
Technical Information TI00419C
Ion-selective sensors
ISEmax CAS40D• Ion selective sensors• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cas40d
Technical Information TI00491C
Turbidity sensors
Turbimax CUS51D• For nephelometric measurements of turbidity and solids in wastewater• 4-beam scattered light method• With Memosens technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cus51d
Technical Information TI00461C
Turbimax CUS52D• Hygienic Memosens sensor for turbidity measurement in drinking water, process waterand in utilities• With Memosens technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cus52d
Technical Information TI01136C
SAC and nitrate sensors
Viomax CAS51D• SAC and nitrate measurement in drinking water and wastewater• With Memosens technology• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cas51d
Technical Information TI00459C

Endress+Hauser

209

Accessories

Liquistation CSF48

Interface measurement
Turbimax CUS71D• Immersion sensor for interface measurement• Ultrasonic interface sensor• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cus71d
Technical Information TI00490C

210

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Technical data

15

Technical data

15.1

Input

Measured variables→ Documentation of the connected sensor

Measuring ranges→ Documentation of the connected sensor

Types of input• 2 analog inputs• 2 binary inputs + 4 binary inputs (optional)• 1 to 4 digital inputs for sensors with Memosens protocol (optional)

Binary input, passive

Span
12 to 30 V, galvanically isolated
Signal characteristics
Minimum pulse width: 100 ms
Signal edge
Low-high

Temperature input

Measuring range-30 to 70 °C (-20 to 160 °F)
Accuracy± 0.5 K
Type of input
Pt1000

Analog input, passive/
activeSpan
0/4 to 20 mA, galvanically isolated
Accuracy±0.5 % of measuring range

Endress+Hauser

211

Technical data

Liquistation CSF48

15.2

OutputOutput signal• 2 binary outputs (standard) + 2 binary outputs (optional):
Open collector, max. 30 V, 200 mA• Up to 2 x 0/4 to 20 mA, active, galvanically isolated from the sensor circuits and fromeach other2 to 6 x 0/4 to 20 mA, active, galvanically isolated from the sensor circuits and fromeach other• Of those, 1 x with optional HART communication (only via current output 1:1). Limited
to 2 current outputs with optional fieldbus communication.

Communication• 1 service interface• Accessible via front panel connection (optional)• Commubox FXA291 (accessory) required for communication with the PC

Output signal

Depending on version:• 2 x 0/4 to 20 mA, active, galvanically isolated from one another and from thesensor circuits• 4 x 0/4 to 20 mA, active, galvanically isolated from one another and from thesensor circuits• 6 x 0/4 to 20 mA, active, galvanically isolated from one another and from thesensor circuits• 8 x 0/4 to 20 mA, active, galvanically isolated from one another and from thesensor circuits• Optional HART communication (only via current output 1:1)
HART
Signal encoding

FSK ± 0.5 mA above current signal

Data transmission rate

1200 baud

Galvanic isolation

Yes

Load (communication resistor)

250 Ω

PROFIBUS DP/RS485
Signal encoding

EIA/TIA-485, PROFIBUS DP-compliant acc. to IEC 61158

Data transmission rate

9.6 kBd, 19.2 kBd, 45.45kBd, 93.75 kBd, 187.5 kBd, 500 kBd,
1.5 MBd, 6 MBd, 12 MBd

Galvanic isolation

Yes

Connectors

Spring terminal (max. 1.5 mm), bridged internally (T‐function),
optional M12

Bus termination

Internal slide switch with LED display

Modbus RS485

212

Signal encoding

EIA/TIA-485

Data transmission rate

2,400, 4,800, 9,600, 19,200, 38,400, 57,600 and 115,200
baud

Galvanic isolation

Yes

Connectors

Spring terminal (max. 1.5 mm), bridged internally (T‐function),
optional M12

Bus termination

Internal slide switch with LED display

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Technical data

Ethernet and Modbus TCP
Signal encodingIEEE 802.3 (Ethernet)

Data transmission rate

10/100 MBd

Galvanic isolation

Yes

Connection

RJ45

IP address

DHCP (default) or configuration via menu

Ethernet/IP
Signal encodingIEEE 802.3 (Ethernet)

Data transmission rate

10/100 MBd

Galvanic isolation

Yes

Connection

RJ45

IP address

DHCP (default) or configuration via menu

PROFINET

Current outputs, active

Signal encodingIEEE 802.3 (Ethernet)

Data transmission rate

100 MBd

Galvanic isolation

Yes

Connection

RJ45

Name of station

Via DCP protocol by means of configuration tool (e.g. Siemens
PRONETA)IP address

Via DCP protocol by means of configuration tool (e.g. Siemens
PRONETA)Span
0 to 23 mA
2.4 to 23 mA for HART communication
Signal characteristic
LinearSignal on alarm
Adjustable, as per NAMUR Recommendation NE 43• In measuring range 0 to 20 mA (HART is not available with this measuring range):
Failure current from 0 to 23 mA• In measuring range 4 to 20 mA: Failure current from 2.4 to 23 mA• Factory setting for failure current for both measuring ranges: 21.5 mA
Load
Max. 500 ΩElectrical specification
Output voltage
Max. 24 V

Endress+Hauser

213

Technical data

Liquistation CSF48

Cable specification
Cable type
Recommended: shielded cable
Cross-section
Recommended: shielded cable

214

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Relay outputs

Technical data

Electrical specification
Relay types• 2 x changeover contact, coupled with binary output (optional)• 1 single-pin changeover contact (alarm relay)• 1 relay card with 2 or 4 relays (optional)
Maximum load
• Alarm relay: 0.5 A• All other relays: 2.0 A
Relay switching capacity
Power unit (Alarm relay)
Switching voltage

Load (max.)

Switching cycles (min.)230 V AC, cosΦ = 0.8 to 1

0.1 A

700,000

0.5 A

450,000

0.1 A

500,000

0.5 A

350,000

Switching voltage

Load (max.)

Switching cycles (min.)230 V AC, cosΦ = 0.8 to 1

5A

100,000

24 V DC, L/R = 0 to 1 ms

5A

100,000

Switching voltage

Load (max.)

Switching cycles (min.)230 V AC, cosΦ = 0.8 to 1

0.1 A

700,000

2A

120,000

115 V AC, cosΦ = 0.8
to 1

0.1 A

24 V DC, L/R = 0 to 1 ms

Relay coupled with binary output

Extension module

2A
24 V DC, L/R = 0 to 1 ms

170,000
0.1 A

2A

1,000,000

500,000

150,000

Minimum load (typical)• Min. 100 mA at 5 V DC
• Min. 1 mA at 24 V DC
• Min. 5 mA at 24 V AC
• Min. 1 mA at 230 V AC

Endress+Hauser

215

Technical data

Liquistation CSF48

15.3
HART

Protocol-specific data

Manufacturer ID

11h

Device type

119Dh

Device revision001h

Device description files (DD/DTM)

www.endress.com/hart
Device Integration Manager DIM

Device variables

PROFIBUS DP

Supported features

PDM DD, AMS DD, DTM,

Manufacturer ID

11h

Device type

155Ch

Profile version

3.02

Device database files (GSD files)

www.endress.com/profibus
Device Integration Manager DIM

Output variables

Modbus RS485

Modbus TCP

216

Supported features• 1 MSCY0 connection (cyclical communication, master class 1
to slave)• 1 MSAC1 connection (acyclical communication, master class 1
to slave)• 2 MSAC2 connections (acyclical communication, master class
2 to slave)• Addressing using DIL switches or software• GSD, PDM DD, DTM

ProtocolRTU/ASCII

Function codes

03, 04, 06, 08, 16, 23

Broadcast support for function codes

06, 16, 23

Output data

16 measured values (value, unit, status), 8 digital values (value,
status)

Input data

4 setpoints (value, unit, status), 8 digital values (value, status),
diagnostic information

Supported features

Address can be configured using switch or software

TCP port

502

TCP connections

3

ProtocolTCP

Function codes

03, 04, 06, 08, 16, 23

Broadcast support for function codes

06, 16, 23

Output data

16 measured values (value, unit, status), 8 digital values (value,
status)

Input data

4 setpoints (value, unit, status), 8 digital values (value, status),
diagnostic information

Supported features

Address can be configured using DHCP or software

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

EtherNet/IP

Technical data

Log

EtherNet/IP

ODVA certification

Yes

Device profile

Generic device (product type: 0x2B)

Manufacturer ID

0x049Eh

Device type ID

0x109

Polarity

Auto-MIDI-X

Connections

CIP

12

I/O

6

Explicit message 6
Multicast

3 consumers

Minimum RPI

100 ms (default)

Maximum RPI

10000 ms

System integration

EtherNet/IP

EDS

Rockwell

Add-on-Profile Level 3, Faceplate for Factory
Talk SE

Input (T → O)

Device status and diagnostic message withhighest priority

IO data

Measured values:• 16 AI (analog input) + Status + Unit
• 8 DI (discrete input) + Status
Output (O → T)

Web server

The web server enables full access to the device configuration, measured values, diagnostic
messages, logbooks and service data via standard WiFi/WLAN/LAN/GSM or 3G routerswith a user-defined IP address.
TCP port

80

Supported features• Remote-controlled device configuration• Save/restore device configuration (via SD card)• Logbook export (file formats: CSV, FDM)
• Access to web server via DTM or Internet Explorer

15.4

Power supply

Supply voltage• 100 to 120/200 to 240 V AC ±10 %, 50/60 Hz• 24 V DC +15/‐9 %Power consumption• Version with vacuum pump: 290 VA• Version with peristaltic pump: 290 VA• Version with sampling assembly: 290 VA• Version with 24V power supply: 240 W

Electrical connection

See the "Electrical connection" section ()Cable entries

Depending on version:• 1 x M25, 7 x M20 cable gland• 1 x M25, 1 x M20 cable gland

Endress+Hauser

Actuating values:• 4 A0 (analog output) + status + unit
• 8 DO (discrete output) + Status217

Technical data

Liquistation CSF48

Permitted cable diameter:• M20x1.5 mm: 7 to 13 mm (0.28 to 0.51")• M25x1.5 mm: 9 to 17 mm (0.20 to 0.67")
Mains fuse

• T3.15A (for 230V power supply)• T10A (for 24V power supply)• T10A (fuse for battery backup)• For version with cCSAus approval: T4A (for cooling module)

Power supply failure

Power supply (optional): 2 x 12 V, 7.2 Ah, with additional charge controller
Replace the rechargeable batteries with type Panasonic LC-R127R2PG1.
Real-time clock: lithium battery, type CR2032

15.5
Sampling methods

Performance characteristics

Vacuum pump/peristaltic pump/sampling assembly:• Event sampling• Single and multiple samples• Sampling table
Vacuum pump:• Time-paced• Flow-paced
Peristaltic pump:• Time-paced• Flow-paced• Flow proportional sampling/time override (CTVV)

Dosing volume

Vacuum pump:
20 to 350 ml (0.7 to 12 fl.oz.)
Peristaltic pump:
10 to 10000 ml (0.3 to 340 fl.oz.)
The dosing accuracy and the repeatability of a sample volume < 20 ml (0.7 fl.oz) canvary, depending on the specific application.
Sampling assembly:
10, 30 or 50 ml (0.3; 1 or 1.7 fl.oz.)

Dosing accuracy• Vacuum pump:± 5 ml (0.17 fl.oz.) or 5 % of the set volume• Peristaltic pump:± 5 ml (0.17 fl.oz.) or 5 % of the set volume• Sampling assembly:± 2 ml (0.07 fl.oz.)

Repeatability

5%

Intake speed> 0.5 m/s (> 1.6 ft/s) for ≤ 13 mm (1/2 in) ID, as per EN 25667, ISO 5667, CEN 16479-1> 0.6 m/s (> 1.9 ft/s) for 10 mm (3/8 in) ID, as per Ö 5893; US EPA

218

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Technical data

Suction height• Vacuum pump:
Max. 6 m (20 ft) or max. 8 m (26 ft), depending on the version• Peristaltic pump:
Max. 8 m (26 ft)

Hose lengthMax. 30 m (98 ft)

Sample supply to sampling
assembly• Minimum height difference: 0.5 m (1.6 ft)• Maximum hose length: 5 m (16 ft)• Material: EPDM black, 13 mm ID

Temperature control

Temperature sensors:• Sampling compartment temperature• Sample temperature (optional)• Outside temperature (optional)
Cooling module:• Sample temperature range: 2 to 20 °C (36 to 68 °F)
Factory setting: 4 °C (39 °F)• Automatic defrost system• Cooling rate in accordance with Ö 5893 (Austrian standard):
4 liters of water at 20 °C (68 °F) cool down to 4 °C (39 °F) in less than 210 minutes• Temperature constancy of sample at 4 °C (39 °F) at an operating temperature range of-15 to 40 °C (5 to 105 °F)

15.6
Ambient temperature
range

Environment

With cooling module:-20 to 40 °C (0 to 104 °F)

Without cooling module:

0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F)

With ASA+PC or stainless steel
housing:-20 to 40 °C (0 to 104 °F)

With plastic polystyrene housing:

0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F)

Storage temperature–20 to 60 °C (–4 to 140 °F)

Electrical safety

In accordance with EN 61010-1, protection class I, environment ≤ 2000 m (6500 ft) above
MSL. The device is designed for pollution degree 2.

Relative humidity

10 to 95%, not condensing

Degree of protection• Front dosing compartment: IP 54• Rear dosing compartment: IP 33• Front panel with display (internal): IP 65• Sample compartment: IP 54
The IP protection ratings listed above apply for individual sections of the overall device.
The resulting degree of protection for the overall device is IP33.

Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC)
Endress+Hauser

Interference emission and interference immunity as per EN 61326-1:2013, Class A for
Industry219

Technical data

Liquistation CSF48

15.7

Process

Medium temperature range

2 to 50 °C (36 to 122 °F)

Process pressure range• Unpressurized, open channel (unpressurized sampling)• Max. 0.8 bar piping (only with shutoff/inlet valve)
Sampling assembly:
Max. 6 bar

Medium properties

Vacuum pump
Capacitance level measurement used for:• Sample media has to be free of abrasive substances.
• Media that tend to create a lot of foam or contain fats and grease• Media with a conductivity < 30 µS/cm
Peristaltic pump
Sample media has to be free of abrasive substances.
Sampling assembly• Sample media has to be free of abrasive substances.
• The distributor version of the device cannot be used for sample media with a solids
content in excess of 1 %. The sample must be transferred directly to a bottle or acontainer.
Pay attention to the material compatibility of the wetted parts.

Process connection• Vacuum pump:
Intake hose ID 10 mm (3/8 in), 13 mm (1/2 in), 16 mm (5/8 in) or 19 mm (3/4 in)• Peristaltic pump:
Intake hose ID 10 mm (3/8 in)• Sampling assembly:• Flange DN50, PP• Triclamp DN50, DIN 32676

15.8

Mechanical construction

Dimensions

See the "Installation" section →  16

WeightSampler version

Weight

Plastic version without refrigeration

91 kg (201 lbs)

Plastic version with refrigeration

101 kg (223 lbs)

Plastic version without refrigeration and with fixedcastor frame

105 kg (232 lbs)

Stainless steel version with refrigeration

118 kg (260 lbs)

Stainless steel version with stand and refrigeration

146 kg (322 lbs)

Materials

220

Plastic polystyrene VO can change color when exposed to direct sunlight. For outdoor
use without a weather protection cover, the use of Plastic ASA+PC V0 isrecommended. The functionality is not affected by the discoloration.

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Technical data

Non-wetted parts
Cabinet housing

Plastic polystyrene V0
For standard applications in wastewater treatment plants andenvironmental monitoring
Plastic ASA+PC V0
For industrial wastewater treatment plants with an aggressive
atmosphere
Stainless steel V2A (1.4301)
For standard applications in wastewater treatment plants andenvironmental monitoring
Stainless steel V4A (1.4571)
For industrial wastewater treatment plants with an aggressive
atmosphere

Sample compartment inner lining

Plastic PP

Window

Safety glass, coatedInsulation

Plastic EPS "Neopor®"

Wetted parts

Vacuum pump

Peristaltic pump

Sampling
assembly

Dosing tube

Plastic PP--

Measuring jug cover

Plastic PP--

Conductivity sensors

Stainless steel V4A(1.4404)--

Capacitance sensor

PSU

-

-

Measuring jug

PMMA, glass(depending on version)--

Dosing system outflow hose

Silicone-

EPDM

Pump tube-

Silicone-

Process seal--

Viton EPDM
KalrezDistribution arm

Plastic PP

Distribution arm cover

Plastic PE

Distribution plate

Plastic PS

Composite container/bottles

Plastic PE, glass (depending on version)

Intake hose

Plastic PVC, EPDM (depending on version)

Hose connection

Plastic PP

Rinse connection--

Plastic PP

Choose process seal depending on the application. Viton is recommended for standard
applications involving watery samples.
Vacuum pump only

Endress+Hauser

Pneumatic hoses

Silicone

Air Manager housing

PC

Air Manager sealing plate

Silicone

Pump head

Aluminum, anodized

Pump membrane

EPDM

221

Technical data

Process connections

222

Liquistation CSF48• Vacuum pump:
Intake hose ID 10 mm (3/8"), 13 mm (1/2"), 16 mm (5/8") or 19 mm (3/4")• Peristaltic pump:
Intake hose ID 10 mm (3/8")• Sampling assembly:• Flange DN50, PP• Triclamp DN50, DIN 32676

Endress+Hauser

Liquistation CSF48

Index

Index
A

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Measuring cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Adapting the diagnostic behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Additional functions
Mathematical functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

B

Binary input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 211
Bottle statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Bus termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

C

Cable terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Calculated pH value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Check
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Chemoclean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Cleaning unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
ConfigureActions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Numerical values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Picklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
User definable screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
User-defined text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Connection
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Optional module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

D

Degassed conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Device description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Device test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Device variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Device-specific diagnostic messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Device-specific errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Diagnostic messages
Adapting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Device-specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Sensor-specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Diagnostics list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Endress+Hauser

Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Distribution arm calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Dual conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

EElectromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Ensuring the degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
EtherNet/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 217
Event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

F

Fieldbus
Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Firmware history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

H

Hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 216

I

Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Input
Measured variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Inputs/outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

L

Laying the cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Logbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

M

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Mathematical functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Calculated pH value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Degassed conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Dual conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
rH value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Measured variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Measuring ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Modbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Modbus RS485 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Modbus TCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Mounting
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Mounting requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

N

Nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

223

IndexO

Operating time information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Operation
Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
OutputCurrent outputs, active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Outputs
PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
PROFINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

PPower supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Connecting optional modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Connecting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Process errors without messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Process pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Product identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 216
Device variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
PROFIBUS variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
PROFINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Device variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
PROFINET variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Program logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Protocol-specific data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

R

Relative humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Replacing the pump tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Replacing the rechargeable batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Requirements for the personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Resetting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
rH value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Liquistation CSF48

Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
State-of-the-art technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
System information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

T

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Current outputs, active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Protocol-specific data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Technical personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Terminal diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Diagnostic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
General troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Types of input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

U

Use
Intended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
User definable screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

W

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 217
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

S

SafetyOperational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Sample volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Sampler controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Scope of delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Security
IT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Sensor calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Sensor information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Sensor-specific diagnostic messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Settings
Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
224

Endress+Hauser

*71588421*
71588421

www.addresses.endress.com